'r>' 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 ^•C' 
 
 ^ / 
 
 ^ 
 
 0- U 
 
 uy 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 r- 
 
 e,\ 
 
 a^^u^ 

 
 TJic Anierican Systc))i of Shorlhand. 
 
 The 
 
 Phonographic 
 Amanuensis. 
 
 A Presentation of Pitman Phonography, More Especially 
 
 Adapted to the Use of Business and Other Schools 
 
 rJevoted to the Instruction and Training 
 
 of Shorthand x'\manuenses. 
 
 By 
 
 Jerome B. Howard. 
 
 With a Prefatory Note by 
 
 Benn Pitman. 
 
 Cincinnati : 
 
 The Phonographic Institute Company. 
 
 1905.
 
 Copyi-ight, 1904, 
 By The Phonogiaphic Institute Company.
 
 //?3 p 
 
 (ilinrtnnatxJ 
 
 4485524
 
 (xciAjltrvju-^Wk Xb VviL ^i|/tuA^ . Jw<^ W(X/wL VtM*- 
 d.c^'vvvAjCvO-'^ To a-wJC , (XAA cA^ WaA*4L Amji-a/v uHoL 
 
 V'^ rwvo Vi^ iLm/\m-^^^ iu^iXiAAK v&A\js.'\\, Vaj\ vAmaS 
 
 lAV 
 
 .(Xwv- 
 
 ^eU. 1 'ok.
 
 Table of Contents. 
 
 Lesson Page 
 
 I. — Straiglit Consonants, ..-..-. >j 
 
 II. — Curved Consonants, ------ lo 
 
 III. — Curved Consonants — Continued, - - - - - 13 
 
 IV. — Second-place Vowels, - ----- - 16 
 
 V. — First-place Vowels, ------- 20 
 
 VI. — Third-place Vowels, - - - - - - . 24 
 
 VII. — Diphthongs, --------- 27 
 
 VIII. — Sentence-writing. — Vowel and iJiplitliong Logogram^-, 29 
 
 IX.— Mp, Mb.— The Upward-r, ------ 35 
 
 X. — Vocalization of R-outlines. — Straight Consonant Logo- 
 grams. — Sentence- writing, ------ 39 
 
 XI. — Downward-1 and Upward-sli, - - - - - - 42 
 
 XII. — Vocalization of L-outlines. — Curved-stroke Logograms. — 
 
 Sentence-writing, ------- 45 
 
 XIII.— W and Y— The Coalescents, - ~ - - - - 48 
 
 XIV.— H— The Aspirate, - - 51 
 
 XV. — Phrase-writing. — The Ticks "The," "A," "An," 
 
 "And," --------- 54 
 
 XVI. — W, Y, and H Logograms. — Sentence-writing, - - 57 
 
 XVII. — Phrase-writing, - - ------ 60 
 
 XVIII. — Contractions, -------- 63 
 
 XIX. — Phrase-writing. — Varied Forms, - - - -.66 
 
 XX. — Compound Words. — Disjoined Affixes, - - 69 
 
 XXI. — The Circle-s-z, -------- 73 
 
 XXII. — The Circle-s and -z. — .Sentence-writing, ■ - ■ 77 
 
 XXIII. — The Circles-.ses, -sez, -zes, -zez, - - - - - 84 
 
 XXIV. — Large Circles. — Sentence- writing, - . - - 87 
 
 XXV. — The Loops St, -str, -------- 91 
 
 XXVI. — The Loo]5s. — Sentence-writing, ----- 94 
 
 XXVII.— The N liook, --------- 99 
 
 5
 
 Tabic of Contents. 
 
 Lesson Page 
 
 XXVIII.— The N-hook.— Sentence-writing, - - - - 102 
 
 XXIX.— The F-V-hook, - 109 
 
 XXX. — The F-V-hook. — Sentence-writing, - - - - in 
 
 XXXI.— The Shun-hook, - - 114 
 
 XXXII.— The Shun-hook.— Sentence-writing, - - - - 1 17 
 
 XXXIII.— The Small W-hook, - - - - - 121 
 
 XXXIV.— The Small W-hook.— Sentence-writing, - - - 123 
 
 XXXV.— The L-hook, - .-..--- 127 
 
 XXXVI. —The L-hook.— Sentence-writing, - - - - 13° 
 
 XXXVII.— The R-hook, ------- 134 
 
 XXXVIII.— The R-hook. — Sentence-writing, - - - 137 
 
 XXXIX. — Irregular Double Consonants. — Intervocalization, - 143 
 
 XL. — Irregular Double Consonants. — Sentence-writing, - 146 
 
 XLI. — Triple Consonants. — Spl-series, - - - - 151 
 
 XLII. — Triple Consonants. — Spr-series, - - - - - '53 
 
 XLIII. — Triple Consonants. — Sentence- writing, - - - 156 
 
 XLIV.— Backward N-hook.— Large W-hook, - - - 159 
 
 XLV.— The Halving Principle.— Simple Strokes, - - 161 
 
 XLVI. — The Halving Principle. — Sentence-writing — I, - - 164 
 
 XLVII. — Halved Strokes with Circles and Loops, - - 170 
 
 XLVIIL— The Halving Principle.— Sentence-writing— II, - - 172 
 
 XLIX.— Halved Strokes with Final Hooks, - - - - 176 
 
 L. — The Halving Principle. — Sentence-writing — III, - 178 
 
 LI. — Halved Strokes with Initial Hooks, - - - 183 
 
 LII. — The Halving Princijjle. — Sentence-writing — IV, - - 185 
 
 LIII. — Free Use of the Halving Principle. — Past Tenses, - 190 
 
 LIV. — The Halving Principle. — Sentence-writing — V, - - 194 
 
 LV.— The Doubling Principle, '98 
 
 LVI. — The Doubling Principle. — Sentence-writing, - - 201 
 
 LVIL— Clashes and Distinctions, - - - - 204 
 
 LVIIL— Proper Names, 208 
 
 LIX. — Conclusion, -------- 214
 
 Th( 
 
 Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 Lesson I.— Straight Consonants. 
 
 I. The Strokes. — 
 
 P as heard in /et and ca/ 
 
 B 
 T 
 D 
 
 Ch 
 
 J 
 
 K 
 
 G 
 
 /uck 
 
 (^/uck 
 
 c/ieer 
 
 y'eer 
 
 rome 
 
 ca;^ 
 ba/ 
 bac/ 
 ri I'/i 
 ridge 
 
 
 to 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 named pe. 
 be. 
 
 te. 
 de. 
 
 chay. 
 jay. 
 kay. 
 gay- 
 
 Exercise I. 
 Learn the phonographic characters thoroughly by reading aloud and then 
 copying, many times, the following exercise. 
 
 I x.\. xx..x\. x\. x\.. x\ w w \\ 
 
 ,.././ IJ. LI /...I Z..Z..._...Z..../...„...Z...Z LI LI LA 

 
 8 
 
 The PhonograpJuc ADiaiiiicnsis. 
 
 2. Directions for Writing. — (^?) AViite the upright and 
 slanting strokes downward. See groups i, 2 and 3. (/') Begin 
 all upright and slanting strokes at the same height — about one 
 sixth of an inch above the line. Double-lined paper ruled to 
 
 this width _\_S..._L_i._../y^. is to be recommended for begin- 
 ners, (r) The horizontal strokes and (see group 4) 
 
 should be written exactly on the lower line. ^ ^\ are inclined 
 forty-five degrees to the left of | | which should be exactly 
 perpendicular. // are inclined thirty degrees to the right of 
 I |. Do not err in making \\ with too little slant away 
 from I . If anything, let them slant a little more than forty- 
 five degrees, thus: \^ >s, . Be particular also to make | | ab- 
 solutely vertical. On no account slant them /// tJie least toward 
 the right. A very s/ii:;ht slant to the /eft \ \ is far less objection- 
 able. (//) Make light strokes very light and the heavy 
 -Strokes only sufficiently shaded to distinguish them clearly. 
 
 3. Joining of Strokes. — \\ iicn a word is written in 
 phonograjjhy, it is necessary first of all to write all the conso- 
 nants without lifting the pen. The second stroke begins 
 where the first ends and so on. 
 
 Exercise II, 
 
 The following exercise should be read and re-read until the student can 
 name the strokes in each combination without hesitation. It should then 
 be carefully copied and re-copied until all tlie oulliucs can be written with 
 accuracy and ease. 
 
 Z. Z. L l_ 
 
 .17... Z ~2 _ H.., 
 
 A. Z_ L L 
 
 J... 1 .n ~i... 
 
 ^ > kk \^ f^f^ 
 
 ■H » ^<:
 
 Straight Consonants. 
 
 4. Directions for Writing. — (<?) Combinations con- 
 taining only one descending stroke rest on the line. See 
 groups 1 and 2. {!>') A horizontal stroke followed by a de- 
 scending stroke should be written just high enough that the 
 descending stroke may rest on the line. See group 2. (r) 
 When two descending strokes are joined, the first rests on 
 the line and the second falls below it. See groups 3 and 4. 
 (</) Two strokes in the same direction should be written with 
 continuous motion of the pen, no pause being made between 
 the strokes. See group 4. When one such stroke is light 
 and the other heavy the heavy stroke tapers to the point of 
 joining, where it is light. 
 
 5. Phonetic Spelling.— In writing phonography the 
 ordinary si)elling is wholly disregarded. Words are written 
 purely by sound. For instance, the word gin begins with /, 
 
 and is used only in writing the sound of 1; heard in get. 
 
 Chemist begins with , and / is used only in writing words 
 
 which contain the sound of ch heard in change. There are 
 no "silent letters " in phonography. The only consonants in 
 the word debt are d-t. 
 
 Exercise III. 
 
 Write in their proper order, using the phonographic signs, the conso- 
 nants of the following words. 
 
 Check, joke, jug, coach, cage, gage, take, lug, duck, dug, code, 
 gate, poach, page, chub, budge, putty, paid, poke, peg, bait, buck, bug, 
 tape, tub, dope, dub, cape, cub, touch, Dutch, jet, pope, cake, judge, toad, 
 debt, keg, poetic, paddock, puppet, baggage, deputy, topic, tobacco, 
 debauch, decayed, judged, cubit, cabbage, chaotic, cadet. 
 
 Write the foregoing exercise repeatedly /><'/« dictalion until all the out- 
 lines can be written with ease and promptness.
 
 Lesson II. — Curved Consonants. 
 6. The Strokes.— 
 
 F 
 
 heard 
 
 in /auk and 
 
 s;ye 
 
 j:: 
 
 V 
 
 named 
 
 ef. 
 
 V 
 
 
 7'ault " 
 
 sa?'e 
 
 s' 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ve. 
 
 Th 
 
 
 ///igh " 
 
 brca/// 
 
 o 
 
 r 
 
 
 ith. 
 
 Th 
 
 
 thy " 
 
 biea///e 
 
 o 
 
 ( 
 
 
 the. 
 
 S 
 
 
 jeal ' ' 
 
 fare 
 
 .= 
 
 ") 
 
 
 es. 
 
 Z 
 
 
 seal ' ' 
 
 pha-ve 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 ze. 
 
 Sh 
 
 
 ^//anie ' ' 
 
 ru.v// 
 
 'C 
 
 y 
 
 
 Ksh. 
 
 Zh 
 
 
 
 rou.i^e 
 
 :/: 
 
 J 
 
 
 zhe. 
 
 Exercise IV. 
 Practise the curved strokes by reading and then copying repeatedly the 
 following exercise. 
 
 I . ,k_V. , V^k. V^^ . \-^.. V.^ ..k-L .k^ V.^ V^L_k_L 
 
 2.C,( ( ( C.( (.„( L( L( (i (,( U L( (( (i (( 
 
 3 )....) )j }..) ):.) 1.) 11 11 11 ).) I.) )..! )..)..„)...) 
 
 ^...j.j. J..J.. J. J. J..J. JJ....J.J.....J.J...J..J. J.J...JJ.. 
 
 7. Directions for Writing. — (yO) These curves should 
 be begun al the san\e hcighl as the upright and slanting 
 straight strokes; that is, one-sixth of an inch above the line 
 (or exactly on the upper or hcad-\\\\<t of double-lined jiaper), 
 and written down to the base- (or lower) line. (A) These 
 signs are arcs of one-fourth of a circle, and should be care 
 
 10
 
 Ctirvcd Consonants. 
 
 1 1 
 
 fully given the proper amount of curve. (r) The strokes 
 V^V_ should be so inclined that their chords=i= will jje forty-five 
 degrees to the left of [ ; /. c, the same slant as the stroke \ 
 The strokes ^J are so inclined that their chords will he 
 forty-five degrees to the right of | . The strokes (^ ( ) ) are 
 so written that their chords are exactly perpendicular to the 
 base-line, and they should on no account slant even slightly to 
 the right. Be careful to give V^V. their full slant away from 
 |. Better a trifle too much than too little. Thus V_ ^s^_ are 
 to be preferred to V^ ^ . {d) Make the light strokes very 
 light and the heavy strokes shaded only in the middle, taper- 
 ing toward the ends. 
 
 8. Joining of Curves. — The curved strokes may be 
 joined to the straight strokes, and to each other, to form out- 
 lines for words. 
 
 Exercise V. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 J. 2. 1_ 1_ 1_ i_, ,{_,(_ 
 
 .._,...3^..z\^ n K D I) :2 15. 
 
 "). D 17 
 
 .zk n :i 
 
 WW 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 H: i i ^ t 
 
 '■'A line which X'i fart of the circumference of a circle is called an arc, and a 
 Straight line which is drawn front one end of an arc to the other is called its chord.
 
 12 TJic Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 9. Directions for Writing. — (<?) The outlines in groups 
 I and 2 rest on the line, the horizontal strokes in group 2 
 being written just high enough to admit of this. (/') In 
 groups 3 and 4, the first stroke rests on the line and the second 
 descends below it. (r) The outlines in group 5 should be 
 written with continuous motion ; that is, with a single un- 
 checked movement of the i)en. In the outlines B-Z, D-V, 
 and V-G the curved stroke is made heavy throughout the en- 
 tire half next to the straight stroke. 
 
 ID. Phonetic Spelling. — Note that /// has two separate 
 and distinct sounds. Tli in bath is as different from th in 
 bathe as is /> from b, or / from v. The ordinary alphabet 
 does not provide a sign for either of these sounds of th, but 
 phonography gives to each its own sign, the one distinguished 
 from the other by its shade. Each is used only when its 
 l)roper sound is heard. The same is true of _J (heard in 
 disli) and J (heard in pleasure^. 
 
 Exercise VI. 
 
 Write the consonanls of the foUowiiii^ WDids : 
 
 Puffy, bevy, Davy, deatii, daisy, Jessie, covey, cozy, gush, fade, fetch, 
 fake, fudge, faith, fussy, fuzzy, vetch, vague, thud, Clsage, shape, shed, 
 shake, puppyish, pathetic, babyish, bishop, Topsy, gypsy, fatigue, fidgety, 
 fagot, vivify. 
 
 Write from dictation tlie foregoing exercise and repeat it until all the 
 outlines can be written without mental hesitation. Also review Exercise 
 III by rewriting from dictation.
 
 Lesson III.— Curved Consonants — Con= 
 tinned. 
 
 II. The Strokes.— 
 
 L as heard in /cap and pee/ >• ' named lay. 
 
 R '< reap " pee; "% ^ " ar. 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 M " weal '' lawe ^ "■ " em. 
 
 c 
 
 N '■' //ail " ma;/ ^ ~_ ■ " en. 
 
 Ng " i//k " so/zi,-- .^ ^^ " ing. 
 
 Exercise VII. 
 
 Practise these strokes first by reading and tlieii by repeatedly copyin^- 
 tlie following exereise. 
 
 x..^..C....C. C ex.. C C.X.C.....C....CX...r.. C.....C. C..C 
 
 2 :>. :^ 2^ ::\ a..a...2^ i:^...^^...:^ 2^ 2^ 2^ r^ a..::^. 
 
 12. Directions for Writing. — (^0 L is written from 
 the line upward. (/') A' is written from top to bottom. 
 (r) The horizontal curves are written from left to right, and 
 they are so placed that the base-line (the lower line of double- 
 
 13
 
 14 
 
 The PJwnog7'aphic Ama^iuensis. 
 
 lined paper) shall form a chord. Thus /// is written .^r-,. and 
 ;/ and ng are written .,,_^..,,_^. 
 
 13. Phonetic Spelling. — Ng is another sound not pro- 
 vided with a letter in the ordinary alphabet. It is the conso- 
 nant heard at the end of such words as long, sing, rung, and in 
 phonography the sound is always represented by the sign s^.^. 
 
 Exercise VIII. 
 
 These curves are joined to each otlier, and to tlie strokes given in the 
 preceding lessons, as shown in the following exercise, which should be 
 repeatedly read and copied. 
 
 T r\ 
 
 c<^ ^_ 
 
 r\ 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 a (1... 
 
 ^2n. Cs. 
 
 f' 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 ~\ 
 
 
 "V 
 
 
 O....D... :x.. 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 
 ■'N'^^ 
 
 
 ■~x 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 .n : 
 
 n rx. 
 
 .rx ^.. :::?. 
 
 .n 
 
 ..:n r:^ _^-.._._ __.,^\/:..v: y'.... r 
 
 ..r:.....r...^. /-../. \^\_ u.., u i^i^ u i^ 
 
 ,...X^..\^ L L L L U L L U -Z: 
 
 .^ u 
 
 n. o o. o. D D..
 
 Curved Consonants — Continued. 15 
 
 14. Directions for Writing.— (^0 Write the outlines 
 in group i with a distinct angle between the strokes. (/^) The 
 outlines in group 2 have no angle and are therefore written 
 with continuous motion, no i^ause being made between the 
 strokes, (t) In writing the outlines in group 3 the true 
 forms of the strokes should l)e modified by slightly rounding 
 the angle at the point of junction so that the outlines may be 
 written with continuous motion. 
 
 Exercise IX. 
 
 Write the consonants of the following words : 
 
 Pail, pair, poem, pony, bale, bear, bony, bung, tail, tore, tame, tongue, 
 dale, door, dumb, chair, chum, gem, coal, core, came, gale, gore, gum, 
 fellow, fair, foam, funny, thumb, assail, sower, share, shame, lope, lobe, 
 ledge, l^ke, leg, loaf, love, lazy, lull, lore, lame, Rome, mope, mudd^.. 
 make, mug, muff, mussy, mush, mail, maim, many, nape, nub, nutty, 
 nudge, knave, numb, pul^, policy, palsy, polish, pink, bulb, ability, bel- 
 lowed, bulge, bulk, tedium, touchily, Tacoma, Toledo, tamely, Tammany, 
 taming, detail, damage, dumbly, domino, dynamo, Duluth, chimney, 
 chunk, kidney. Cockney, cozily, cozier, cashier, comedy, comic, Canada, 
 kink, gulp, gulch, gulf, gamely, gaming, fathom, fussily, hlch, failure, 
 ^airly, famish, female, funnier, valor, vanity, asleep, shadily, shakily, shan>- 
 ihg, shanty, shank, locate, luckily, lofty, lazily, lazier, lurk, lamely, 
 laming. Lynch, lunge, rummage, roaming, mutiny, muddier, ma^ic, 
 mawkish, maggot, mussily, mussier, milk, mimic, maniac, manage, month, 
 monkey, nabob, anthem, nothing, Newark, namely. 
 
 Write from dictation, as before, and review Exercises III and VI by re- 
 writing from dictation.
 
 Lesson IV. — Second-place Vowels. 
 
 15. The Signs. — 
 
 A (a) as heard in ddV and tichc is wrilten in jilionography |» 
 
 0(0) " sno7a " o\<:\ " |- 
 
 K (c) " ^-bb " nrt " |- 
 
 U (u) " //]) " t//b " |- 
 
 The vowel -signs are merely the dots and dashes. As they 
 cannot be written alone, but nuist be jilaced to some adjacent 
 consonant, the stroke 1 is here used for the ])ur|ioseof illus- 
 tration. 
 
 Exercise X. 
 
 Learn tlie vovvel-sigiis by readint,' and tlien I'opyini,^ repeatedly tlie 
 loiluwing e.vercise. 
 
 iXN. 1- I-// _ ^ V_.^(ii )'1...J'.J.J^....^...^ 
 
 2X.X.1-I-AA V^^(r.t..)-)-XXX ^ _ 
 
 II '1 
 
 3 XX -1 4 / / ^ ^XX-(.-( )AJ.J.:C.2^ ^.:._ 
 
 4 xx-1 -ly / _i_ _L x.x-(-c-)-),x^r ~h..j^..^., 
 
 5.xx,i i/./__ X ^i-DiJJ. r:.x^.__ 
 
 6.xx-i.-i.yy _^ .^xx-cx^ixxxx^.^^ 
 
 16. Directions for Writing. — (^0 Write all these 
 vowels exactly opposite the iiiiti(//r j)oint of each consonant 
 
 16
 
 Second-Place Vowels. 1 7 
 
 stroke. (/') \\'hen the \o\vel is to be read :v?, fo/Zoiciii}^ the 
 consonant it should be written to the right of upright and 
 slanting strokes, and below horizontal strokes. See groups 1 
 and 2. W'hen the vowel is to be read a'-, />>ri-ed!iig the con- 
 sonant it should be written to the left of the upright and 
 slanting, and above the horizontal, strokes. See groups 3 to 6. 
 (^•) The dashes (' and /? must always be written so as to be 
 exactly at right angles to the stroke to which they are placed. 
 {d) A is distinguished from <"■ by being made slightly heavier, 
 and is similarly distinguished from ft. (<■) In writing the 
 light vowels, i)lace the point of the pen on the paper with 
 merely enough pressure to make a mark. In writing the 
 heavy vowels, sufficient ])ressure is given to the pen to spread 
 the points very slightly. If a pencil be used, a very slight 
 rotation of the jjcncil between the thumb and forefinger will 
 produce sufficient shade in a heavy dot. Never make a 
 heavy dot by first tracing a .small circle and then " filling in." 
 The distinction between light and heavy dots, as between light 
 and heavy strokes, should be secured rather by making the 
 light signs \ery light than by overshading the heavy ones. 
 
 17. Phonetic Spelling-. — (<0 The sign |- stands for 
 the vowel heard in the word day. It makes no differ- 
 ence how much the longhand "spelling" of this sound 
 may vary (^day, fail, late, e/i^iit, break, vein, /key) the soi/iid 
 is always one and the same, and in phonography it is al- 
 ways written with the same sign |- (/') The vowel heard 
 in sncnv is represented by the sign |- which is always used 
 in writing that sound, no matter how it may be "spelled" 
 in longhand — snow, i:;o, f/iouo/i, lioe, bcait, sew, foal, soul. 
 (r) |- stands for the vowel heard in <^M and is always written 
 when that sound is heard, even though in longhand it may be 
 "spelled" as in ei>l>, any, said, head, heifer, leopard, friend,
 
 i8 
 
 The PJionograpJiic Am am ten sis. 
 
 guess, biDj, Altna. (t/) j- represents the vowel which 
 begins ///. The same vowel is heard in the words doue and 
 tongue, but in phonography it is always represented by j— . 
 
 Exercise XI. 
 
 Read and copy repeatedly the following words. 
 
 I \...X . I- -^ . A^ €. ^ ^ _ _ 
 
 2,,X...>\ I / _j_ -L ).. -C. 2^ 2\ 
 
 X 
 
 ,i<Z].„ 
 
 r!Z 
 
 i8. Vowels between Consonants. — When a vowel- 
 sign falls between two strokes, it is possible to write it after 
 the first or before the second. Write a and o after the first 
 stroke and e and // before the second. These vowel-signs will 
 thus be distinguished, the one from the other, by the strokes to 
 which they are written, as well as by their size. (/') Write 
 words like air, pair, dare, chair, with the heavy dot. The 
 perfect sound of a is never heard before r.
 
 Second- Place ]'\nvch. 19 
 
 Exercise XII. 
 
 Write in phonography the following words, inserting all vowels. 
 
 1. Bay, toe, dough, jay, go, they, say, so, show, may, nay, no. 
 
 2. Ate, oat, age, ache, egg, ace, owes, ell, air, aim. 
 
 3. Poach, poke, puck, pug, pole, pour, pup, babe, boat, butt, bake, buck, 
 bug, bathe, bowl, bear, burr, tape, toad, take, tuck, tail, tear, tame, dome, 
 dope, date, debt, duck, death, dole, dull, door, choke, chuck, chore, Job, 
 jut, jug, gem, cope, code, coach, cake, keg, cull, core, came, goat, gale, 
 gore, gum, fed, fudge, faith, fur, fame, thumb, shade, shed, share, ledge, 
 luck, loaf, loath, loathe, lame, make, month, muff, mush, mole, maim, 
 nudge, knave, name, numb. 
 
 4. Echo, effect, elbow, mellow, meadow, Monday, oakum, unsay, un- 
 make. 
 
 Write Exercises XI and XII repeatedly from dictation, as heretofore, 
 and review all preceding exercises by rewriting from dictation.
 
 Lesson V. — First-place Vowels. 
 
 19. The Signs. — 
 
 E (c) as heard in <-ase and tivv is written in jilionogiaphy | 
 
 Aw (a) "■ a\\ " S(/7t' " |~ 
 
 I (i) " /n " t/p " I' 
 
 O (6) " odd '' wot " P 
 
 These vowel-signs are exactly the same as those given in 
 the last lesson except that they are written at the /vi,'////////i,>- 
 of the stroke to which they are i)laced. They are written 
 exactly at right angles to straight strokes and at right angles 
 
 to the cliorih of ctnves, thus: Ij -^ . The i)lace which 
 the vowels in this lesson occupy is called, for the sake of dis- 
 tinction, the///'.v/ vowel ])lace, and tlie signs are s]joken of as 
 first-place vowel signs. ^'owels written in the middle of the 
 stroke (those, namely,, given in Lesson IV) are second ]>lace 
 vowels. It nuist he noted that when a rirst-])la«e vowel is 
 written to ( it is placed at the botioiii of the stroke, be- 
 cause this stroke begins at the bottom, and the first \owel- 
 place is always at the beginning of the stroke. 
 
 Exercise XIII. 
 
 I.earn llip lirsl-place vowels l)y reading and tluii copying re])eatcdly llie 
 following exercise. 
 
 , \ \ r r /•/• .- - ^ ^ (•(• )■ )• J JC ^ '- 
 
 Wrr rr - - c e re dwx r
 
 First-Place Vowels. 21 
 
 4 - — " -~ 
 
 6 — - - 
 
 20. Position of Strokes.— All the strokes in the pre- 
 ceding exercise are written in what is called the Jirs/ /><>si//o/i. 
 An ujjright or slanting stroke in the first position is so placed 
 that its lowest point shall be half the height of the letter | 
 above the base-line ; if double-lined paper is used, a stroke 
 in the first position will be cut at exactly its middle point by 
 the upper line. A horizontal stroke in the first position is so 
 placed that it shall be at the height of the stroke j above the 
 base-line. A straight horizontal stroke in the first position 
 will therefore exactly coincide with the head-line of double- 
 lined i)aper. The chord of a horizontal curve in the first 
 position will exactly coincide with the upper line, thus: 
 
 21. Phonetic Spelling.— (</) The sign ] stands for the 
 vowel-sound in the word ease. It makes no difference how 
 this sound may be rei)resented in the ordinary orthography 
 (/ic, see, here, beast, people, iiiaehine, field, leisure, Qesar, 
 qitav, Phcelms) the sound, which is always one and the sanie 
 sound, is written in phonography with the sign | (/') \ 
 represents the vowel heard in all, and is invariably used 
 in phonograi)hy for writing that sound, no matter how 
 spelled in longhand — laio, ^a/'dy, hroad, ouj^lif, nor, almost, 
 falcon, 7C'ar. {e) | stands for the vowel heard in ///, and is 
 always written for that sound, even though in longhand it 
 may be spelled as in if, system, been, sieve, build, busy,
 
 2 2 The PJionographic Amamicnsis. 
 
 7voincu. ((/) I represents the vowel heard in o^/t/. This 
 vowel is variously "spelled" in the words so/>, la/ur/, knowl- 
 edge, yacht, but in phonography it is always represented 
 
 by r^ 
 
 22. Position-writing. — (<0 Whenever the vow^el in a 
 word is a first-place vowel the consonant outline of the word 
 is regularly written in the first position. See groups i to 3 of 
 the following exercise. (/^ To write in the first position 
 an outline of more than one stroke, the outline must be so 
 placed that the first ui)right or slanting stroke shall occupy 
 the first position, (r) If the outline consist entirely of hori- 
 zontal strokes, of course the first stroke determines the po- 
 sition, i^d) Whenever the vowel in a word is a second-place 
 vowel the consonant outline of the word is regularly written 
 in the second position, that is to say, resting on the base-line. 
 All the outlines in the first four lessons in this book are in 
 the second position. (<") Whenever there are two or more 
 vowels in a word, the accented \o\\yA determines the position 
 of the outline— if it is a//;-j-/-place vowel the outline is writ- 
 ten in \\\<t first position, if it is a second-\i\d.cQ. vowel the out- 
 line is written in the second position. See groups 4 and 5. 
 
 Exercise XIV. 
 
 To l)e read and copied : 
 
 \ \ /^ ^ (- r c - 
 
 I - ^ --
 
 rv. 
 
 First-Place Vowels. 
 
 23 
 
 23. First-place Vowels Between Consonants. — 
 
 When a first-place vowel-sign falls between two strokes, al- 
 ways write it after the first. 
 
 Exercise XV. 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Paw, tea, key, caw, see, she, j)shaw, me, knee. 
 
 2. Odd, eve, eel, ear. 
 
 3. Pick, p^g, pill, peel, peer, pip, pod, pitch, bob, bought, beech, beak, 
 big, bill, beam, tip, tick, tall, team, deep, daub, ditch, Dick, dig, dog, 
 deal, dim, cheap, chop, cheek, chick, cheer, job, jog, jeer, kid, cock, keel, 
 king, gall, fib, feed, fog, fear, thief, sheep, shop, shock, leap, lop, lodge, 
 leak, league, leaf, leave, limb, rim, mob, meal, knob, niche, nick. 
 
 4. Putty, puppy, pitchy, pokey, pithy, Polly, penny, baby, Biddy, beachy, 
 balky, boggy, buggy, bevy, Bessie, Billy, billow, bony, bunny, toady, 
 touchy, tinny, ditty, dickey, decay, dizzy, Dolly, delay, chubby, chalky, 
 chummy, jockey, Jessie, jolly, Jimmie, Johnnie, Jennie, Kitty, coffee, 
 Keeley, Kelley, gaudy, gawky, gamey, guinea, foggy, fussy, filly, Foley, 
 fellow, finny, veto, volley, lady, leaky, Lizzie, lily, loamy, meadow, mushy, 
 Mollie, Mamie, Minnie, many, knobby, naughty, nutty. 
 
 5. Apish, audit, ebony, enemy, inch, ink, oddity. " 
 
 Write Exercises XIV and XV from dictation, and review as heretofore.
 
 Lesson VI.— Third-place Vowels. 
 
 24. The Signs. — 
 
 Ah (il) as heard in <?hllS and iav is written in phonography |_ 
 
 Oo (11) " (^oze " shoe " L 
 
 A (a) " dt " t(/ck " I 
 
 U (i.i) " p//ll " loot " \_ 
 
 These vowel-signs are distinguished froni those given in the 
 last two lessons by being placed at the e//t/ oi the stroke, or, 
 as it is called, in the //i/n/ vowel-place. 
 
 Exercise XVI. 
 
 Learn the third-place vowels by reading and then repeatedly copying the 
 following exercise. 
 
 ' ^;N. I: I: /■■■/••=: i_:-V:3-^ H U'^- ^>"^ - 
 
 2 N^N^ bhti - _, \^...^..(_.(,:bl-^ ■■:>'■ /^-^^ 3, 
 
 3 N,H.i .I-./-/ - - V^-.^..<:.,(...,3,)....^.^../^...:^...;^.^ 
 
 4 N;\_|jy./ ^--^ V:^..,^..H:.J^.-_)...^)...^,y...^...::^^,...:^.^ 
 
 5 H\-:l j./:/z. z:. V^-.^^ (.(■.,) .).^^^.A:>^ .^...^.^ 
 
 25. Position of Strokes. — The strokes in the preceding 
 exercise are written in what is (ailed the third position. 
 
 24
 
 TJiird-PIacc Vowels. 
 
 25 
 
 Upright and slanting strokes are so jjlaced that the Ixise-line 
 cuts thcni at their middle point. Horizontal strokes are 
 written at a distance below the base-line exactly ec^ual to half 
 the length of a stroke I ; thus : _, _ 
 
 26. Phonetic Spelling. — (^0 The sign | stands for the 
 vowel heard in the word bar. This sound is variously written 
 in longhand, as in car, calm, Jicart, scri^eaiif. It has but the 
 one invariable sign |^ in phonography. (/-) |_ uniformly 
 rejiresents the vowel heard in fool, though in longhand this 
 sound is represented in as many as five different ways — ri/de^ 
 crew, fruit, you, food. (c) | stands for the vowel heard in 
 frf. This sound is uniformly represented in longhand by " a. " 
 (^/) |_ stands for the vowel heard in /////. This vowel is 
 variously written in longhand, as in////, 7C'o//', could, hook. 
 
 27. Position-writing. — (<?) Whenever the accented 
 vowel of a word is a third-place vowel, the outline of the word 
 is written in the third position. See groups i to 4 in the 
 following exercise. 
 
 Exercise XVII. 
 
 To he read and copied. 
 
 \~-zJ-
 
 26 The PhoJiographic Amanuensis. 
 
 =Z3 -.-f W^ /^ 
 
 I 
 
 s X i^ llZ /Ox 1 3 
 
 ^ '^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 28. Third-place Vowels between Consonants.— 
 
 When a third-place vowel-sign falls between two strokes, write 
 it before the second of the two strokes (see groups 2 to 4). 
 
 29. Consecutive Vowels. — When two consecutive 
 vowel-signs come between two strokes, write the first vowel- 
 sign after the first stroke and the second vowel-sign before 
 the second stroke. See group 5. 
 
 Exercise XVIII. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Patch, path, pool, par, palm, boot, batch, back, bag, booth, bar, balm, 
 bang, tab, took, tooth, tar, tomb, dab, dam, chewed, jute, jag, coop, cab, 
 catch, cash, car, gap, gag, gash, food, fag, fang, thatch, shad, sham, latch, 
 lack, laugh, loom, room, map, Madge, mash, nab, nook, gnash. 
 
 2. Pappy, Paddy, pussy, booby, baggy, bushy, bully, tabby, taffy, toga, 
 tally, data, dally, Dana, chaffy, Judy, Java, Juno, cookie, cooley, canoe, 
 goody, fatty, Fanny, valley, shabby, shaggy, laddie, lassie, Lena, Mocha, 
 massy, mamma, natty, Nannie. 
 
 3. Peony^ gnawing, poem, lower, Jewish, gaiety, feeing. 
 
 Write repeatedly from dictation, as heretofore, until all outlines can be 
 written promptly without conscious effort. In like manner use every 
 reading and writing exercise in tiiis book as a dictation exercise, which 
 must become familiarized by repeated writing from dictation before the ad- 
 vance is made to the next lesson. At every stage of the student's advance- 
 ment the preceding exercises should frequently be reviewed by writing 
 them from dictation.
 
 Lesson VII. — Diphthongs. 
 
 30. The Signs. — (<?) 
 
 IV 
 
 I (I) as heard in /ce ami mv is written in i)honography 1 
 
 Oi (oi) " oi\ " hoy " P 
 
 C)\v (o\v) " 07d " Xhoii " 1^ 
 
 {/>) The signs point exactly down and up, and do not, like 
 the dash vowels, change their direction in accordance with 
 the direction of the stroke to which they are written. (^•) / 
 and oi are first-place vowel-signs, and ow is a third-place 
 vowel-sign, and they govern the first and third positions re- 
 
 spectively. Thus — buy , toy , vow \^. (^) But as "^ 
 
 is an absolute sign — that is, one which is not dependent on its 
 vowel-place for its legibility, it may in practise be written 
 in anv vowel-place, as may be most convenient. Notwith- 
 standing this, it always governs the first position. Thus : 
 
 x^ iv )v y^ 
 
 Exercise XIX. 
 
 To he read and cojiied. 
 
 ^^ 1^ ^ ^ l.:^S LL ^ p ^ ' 
 
 2 .\ ^. ."^ ."^ I. .^.._^-k 41.^ 4 Ct-. .^. 
 
 - " / ^■■■~ r ~'~t7- 
 
 t 
 
 27
 
 TJie PhonograpJiic Aniaiuicnsis. 
 
 ^ U 1. V ^' ^) 1_ "^ 
 
 
 X ^ T. L 
 
 L 
 
 31. Joined Diphthong-signs. — When a diphthong be- 
 gins or ends a word, the sign may be joined to its adjaceHt 
 consonant without lifting the pen, if it make a convenient 
 joining — that is, if the angle formed in joining it is a right 
 angle or an acute angle. See group 3. It should never be 
 joined when an obtuse angle would be formed. 
 y 32. Consecutive Vowels. — i^a) When a word begins 
 with two consecutive vowels the first should be written further 
 away from and the second nearer to the adjacent consonant 
 stroke. (/') When a word ends with two consecutive vowels 
 the first is written nearer to and the second further away from 
 the adjacent consonant stroke. See groui) 4. 
 
 Exercise XX. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Tie, pie, thigh, sigh, lie, toy, coy, annoy, vow, aisle, our. 
 
 2. Pike, pile, bias, tyi)e, diet, dike, dyer, chide, guile, fire, like, live, 
 lime, mighty, knife, toil, decoy, coil, power, dower, cowl, vouch. 
 
 3. How, thou, sow, mow, nigh, item, Ida, ivy, ice, icy, eyes, Isaac, ire, 
 Irish, irony, oil, oily. 
 
 4. lota, Ionic, payee. Let), idea, genii, Genoa.
 
 Lesson VIII. — Sentence-writing. — Vowel 
 and Diphthong Logograms. 
 
 33. Value and Use of Position-writing, — XTp to 
 
 this point, the learner has written only detached words in 
 phonography. He is now to advanee into a new field and 
 write sentences. The great difference between the writing of 
 mere words and the writing of words combined to form sen- 
 tences is this : In writing a detached word it is, in general, 
 necessary to write the entire word, vowels as well as con- 
 sonants ; otherwise the word could not be read with certainty. 
 But in writing sentences "most words may safely be repre- 
 sented merely by their consonant outlines, the vowels being 
 wholly or partly omitted. The written consonants of a word 
 form what is called the outline of the word. Thus \-^is the 
 
 outline of the word/(?/r. But it is also the outline of pear, 
 and of peer, and of par, and of pour, and of pyre, and of 
 
 power. It is true that the outline ..._:::x.can not be read as 
 pear, or pair, or pour, ov par, ox poor, ox power, but only as 
 peer ox pyre ; for the fact that the outline is written in the 
 Jirsf position plainly shows that the missing vowel, whatever 
 it may be, must be a y?/-jr/-place vowel. Likewise^^,^^ can 
 
 stand only iox pair, pear, ox pour, and can not possibly repre- 
 sent any one of the other five words ; while .\^ represents 
 
 par, poor, ox power. This illustration makes clear the value 
 and use of position-writing. It enables us to omit vowels 
 
 29
 
 30 ■ The Phonographic Avianuensis. 
 
 and still to know something about those omitted vowels — to 
 know what vowel-place the accented vowel of a word would 
 "occupy if it were replaced in the outline. 
 
 34. Context. — But, even with the help thus given by po- 
 sition-writing, it is evident that if the bare consonantal out- 
 line .>w. be written alone, no one can say positively which 
 
 of three different words it stands for — for it may stand for 
 any one of them. The necessity for inserting the vowels in 
 writing detached words is therefore apparent. In sentence- 
 writing, however, the case is quite different, for a new element 
 of legibility comes into play. This element is called context. 
 The sentence is a group or series of words which, standing 
 together, make sense. So, in determining which one of sev- 
 eral possible meanings a given outline has in a given sen- 
 tence, we must choose that particular word which, taken to- 
 gether with the other known words of the sentence, will 
 complete and perfect their meaning. In the sentence, " Pity 
 the sorrows of a \ ..... old man," we have no hesitation in 
 
 reading the outline \^^^^.... as poor. It would be absurd to say 
 par or potver. \ 
 
 35, Limits of Position- writing. — It has just been 
 shown that as many as seven words may have the same con- 
 sonant outline — in some cases the number is even greater — 
 but position-writing and context are generally sufficient to 
 make all these words legible in sentence-writing without 
 vowels. A little inquiry will show that it is only the shorter 
 of the consonant outlines — those containing but few conso- 
 nants — which stand for any considerable number of words. 
 A longer outline will stand for fewer words, and a very long 
 outline, one, that is, which contains many consonants, is al- 
 most certain to stand for but a single word. Such a word
 
 Vozucl and DipJithoiig Logograms. 31 
 
 will be legible by its consonant outline alone, and in reading 
 it the trained phonographer does not need even the help af- 
 forded by position-writing. As a rule, therefore, outlines 
 containing three or more strokes are not written in position, 
 but are placed on the base-line — the most convenient })lace — 
 irrespective of the place of the accented vowel. Outlines 
 containing only one or two strokes are regularly written in 
 position. 
 
 36. Initial Vowels Generally Inserted. — Position- 
 writing and context, as has been shown, enable us to dispense 
 with by far the greater number of vowels in a sentence. But 
 there are certain cases in which the vowels should be re- 
 tained. Proper names ought generally to be vocalized ; 
 that is, to have their vowel-signs written. So also ought 
 strange, odd and unusual words. Again, when a word be- 
 gins with a vowel we ought to know the fact at once, in 
 order that we may begin right in reading it, and so avoid 
 hesitation and stumbling. The general rule, therefore, is 
 that when a word begins with a vowel the vowel-sign 
 
 must be written. The frequently-recurring words also, 
 
 V^_ enough, and . — ^_^ among, however, may be written 
 without their initial vowels. Final vowels are not so im- 
 portant as initial vowels ; nevertheless in most cases their 
 presence should be shown. It is not necessary, however, to 
 write the final vowel when it is the only vowel in the word, 
 nor is it necessary to vocalize the final syllable -ly when it in- 
 dicates an adverbial ending. 
 
 37. Logograms. — The matter of recurrency — the great 
 inequality in the use of words — is another peculiarity of 
 sentence-writing. Certain common words are constantly 
 being used over and over again. Every page, almost every
 
 32 The PJiouograpJiic Ainamicnsis. 
 
 line, of every book contains the word tlic one or more 
 times. It is a fact that although there are hundreds of 
 thousands of words in the English language, fewer than 
 two hundred of them, through being frequently repeated, 
 make up at least one-half the Inilk of English written 
 or spoken discourse. To write these frequently-recurring 
 words with their full phonographic representation would be 
 inconvenient, and, indeed, practicably impossible, in keeping 
 pace with the utterance of a rapid speaker. Many such words 
 are therefore abbre\iated in phonography and are written, for 
 the most part, with but a single motion of the pen, and in any 
 case with but a single sign — vowel or consonant. These signs 
 are called logograms, and the words represented by them are 
 called graminalogues. A logogram always consists of some 
 part of the complete i)honographic representation of its 
 grammalogue, and in most cases that part is chosen whic:h is 
 most likely to suggest the full word. 
 
 38. Vowel and Diphthong Logograms. — rhe fol- 
 lowing are the vowel and diphthong logograms : 
 
 V 
 
 the . a . an, and I, eye a how 
 
 of \ to or I but on ^ should 
 
 all \ too, two already 1 before owe ought /who. 
 
 39. Directions for Writing. — The logograms should be 
 written the same in size as vowel- and diphthong-signs used in 
 vocalizing consonant outlines. They are distinguished by 
 direction and ])Osition. The dash signs are all written down, 
 except on and should, which are written up. All first-])Osition 
 signs are so written that they shall end o\\ the upper line, thus, 
 
 Punctuate as in longhand, except that the period 
 
 is made with a small cross, and the dash is written thus -v-
 
 Voivel and DiphtJiong Logografns. '^^Ty 
 
 Exercise XXI. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 I X...: C... ":::.., x....^ * /. 2., 
 
 Exercise XXII. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 I. Lock the door on the thief and fear nothing. 2. They know joy 
 enough who know the joy of living a loving life. 3. To make a fair name, 
 I ought to deal fairly by all. 4. They who live a life of ease should go and 
 see life among the lowly. 5- They take but a low aim who live a life of 
 ease. 6. They who go on the path to fame should know no fear of toil. 
 7. They who love the law also keep the law. 8. Attack the enemy or the 
 3
 
 34 
 
 The Phonographic AnuDiucnsis. 
 
 enemy may make an attack. 9. Tliey who keep all they tuucli may go to 
 jail. 10. They who know nothing of the path may go too far. 1 1 . Two 
 may share a joy and so add joy to joy. 12. They who know the path 
 know how far to go. 13. They may go to the bottom of the ditch who 
 leap before they look. 14. They already know a deal who know they 
 know nothing. 15. They who owe the debt ought to pay the debt. 
 16. Keep an eye on a thief; show a back to a knave. 
 
 U/r 
 
 
 'Y^'^'^u^ 
 
 v/^
 
 Lesson IX.— Mp, Mb.— The Upward-r. 
 
 40. Mp, Mb. — The sign -^, not being required for the 
 representation of any simple consonant, is usefully emijloyed 
 to represent the combination //// (see group i in the exercise 
 below), and also, but more rarely, mb (see group 2). 
 
 Exercise XXIII. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 Exercise XXIV. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Pump, pimple, tamp, temple, dump, damply, camp, thump, lamp, 
 romp, rump, amply, impel, amplifying, ampHfier, camping, damping, 
 shampoo. 
 
 2. Embellish, rumble, limbo, tumble, fumble, ramble, mumble, akimbo, 
 embalming. 
 
 41. The Upward-r. — In addition to the sign ^ al- 
 ready provided for the representation of ;-, the sign y^ is also 
 used. This sign at first sight seems to be the same as the 
 stroke / ch. There is, however, this radical difference be- 
 tween them, that whereas ch is always written from top to 
 bottom (see paragraph 2) the Si^n y^ r is invariably written 
 
 35
 
 36 The PJwnographic Amanitcnsis. 
 
 from bottom to top. It is therefore often spoken of as " the 
 upward r, " but, for convenience in naming, it may be calltd 
 ray, to distinguish it from ^, called ar. Like I lay, ray\^ 
 vocalized from the bottom. Compare par. 19. 
 
 42. Directions for Writing. — Ray differs from ch also 
 in slant. Ch (see paragraph 2) is written at a slant of thirty 
 degrees to the right of | . The slant of ray, however, is 
 sixty degrees to the right of j ; and it is important when it 
 stands alone to write it carefully at this slant in order that it 
 may not be mistaken for cli. When, however, ray follows 
 the stroke/ or ?■, or when it either follows or precedes /' or ^i,*-, 
 it should be written at a slant' closely approaching that of cJi, 
 thus V / V / / / / / It will be imi:)Ossible 
 in these outlines to read ray as ch, because the outline shows 
 that the stroke is written up7oard. By reducing the slant as 
 here directed very obtuse angles are avoided. Such angles 
 are slow and inconvenient of formation. 
 
 43. Initial R. — {a) When r begins a word, use ray (see 
 group I below); except (/^) when it is followed by ;;/, mp, or 
 mb, in which case use (//' (see group 2). (^) When a vowel 
 begins a word and is followed by r, use ar (see group 3); ex- 
 cept (rt^) when r is followed by a descending stroke, other 
 than ar or is]i, when ray should be used (see group 4). 
 
 44. Final R. — (<^0 When r ends a word, use ar (see 
 group 5); except (/^) after m, mp, ray, or two descending 
 strokes, when ray should be used (see group 6). {/) When 
 a vowel ends a word preceded by r, use ray. See group 7. 
 
 45. Medial R. — {a) When r is the only consonant in a 
 word and is l)Oth preceded and followed by a vowel, use ar. 
 See group 8. (^b) When r is medial in an outline (that is 
 to say, when it is both preceded and followed by other conso- 
 nants), ray is generally used (see group 9), but (r) ar may 
 be used if more convenient (see group 10).
 
 Mp, Mb.— The Vp7vard-r 
 
 Exercise XXV. 
 
 37 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 V K SJ. .M.^ V -i 
 
 Z_.v^„^. 
 
 .c><:_kz .xi/ 
 
 •"^. -"^ '^' 
 
 sus^^-^i^ k\j! ^.mx^xm;^-^ 
 
 4485J24
 
 o 
 
 8 Tlic PlionoorapJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 Exercise XXVI. 
 To be written in phonogrnijhy. 
 
 1. Ray, rue, row, rate, rake, wreatli, rock, ruby, roach, rang, racy, 
 royalty, ravage, rickety, retouch, wrath, rasli, rainy, range, rack, reach, 
 recoil, relay, repeal, revoke, ranch, retire, reviving, rip, rib, ring, rid, 
 write, ringing, rocky, rope, robe, rowing, Ruth, rush, ruddy, rudely, 
 wretch, wrench, rung, 
 
 2. Roam, rim, roomy, roaming, remedy, remarry, rhyming, rummage, 
 ramp, rumple. 
 
 3. Air, ire, arm, Irisli, early, airily, army, arcade. 
 
 4. Arch, Irving, arrayed, Arab, earthy. 
 
 5. Deer, car, sower, pour, fire, attire, core, layer, boiler, dealer, adore, 
 afar, arrear, beer, bore, bowler, burr, chair, door, dyer, assayer, far, fowler, 
 gore, liar, paler, pillar, repair, tar, tailor, tore, unbar, error. 
 
 6. Mere, mire, mar, mare, moor, demur, timer, emj)f)wer, roar, rare, 
 narrower, admirer, borrower, inferior, juror, repairer, terrier, abjure. 
 
 7. Dory, gory, zero, opera, ferry, merry, theory, Laura, memory, vic- 
 tory, berry, Gary, chary, diary, emery, fiery, Jerry, Mary, marry, Perry, 
 Pharaoh, tarry, tory, 
 
 8. Array, arrow, airy, Ira. 
 
 9. Forge, mirth, tarried, rarify, parade, barb, birch, dirty, embark, 
 march, mark, outrage, park, porch, pork, purge, terrific, tirade, torrid. 
 
 10. Farm, Jerome, Carlyle, cork, lark.
 
 Lesson X. — Vocalization of R-outlines.— 
 
 Straight Consonant Logograms. — 
 
 Sentence-writing. 
 
 46. Initial and Final Vowels. — The rules for writing 
 the upward and downward forms of /', given in the last pre- 
 ceding lesson, have an imi)ortant bearing on the matter of in- 
 serting initial and final vowels in sentence-writing (see par. 
 36), since they enable us to dispense with the writing of 
 many such \owels. 
 
 47. Initial and Final Vowels Indicated.— (<7) When 
 an outHne begins with ^\, we know by the form itself 
 that the word begins with a vowel ; and when an outline 
 ends with X , we likewise know that the word ends with 
 a vowel. It is therefore unnecessary in these cases to write 
 the vowel — the outline tells us it is there. The only ex- 
 ception to this is in the case of initial ^followed hy ,^^etc. 
 (see par. 43 b~), and final /''^ preceded X-ty .—.etc. (see par. 44 
 /^). In both these cases the outline fails to give any definite 
 information about the vowel, and, therefore, the initial or 
 fmal vowel should actually be written. (/-) ^^'hen an out- 
 bne begins with y or ends with ^ we know that the word 
 begins or ends with the consonant /'. The only exception 
 here is in the case of words like cartJi (see par. 43 c/) in 
 which the initial vowel must Ije written, and in words like 
 arroii.' (see par. 45 a') in which the final \owel must be 
 written. 
 
 48. Straight-stroke Logograms. — The following 
 logograms are derived from the straight consonant strokes. 
 
 39
 
 40 The Phonographic Amaimcnsis, 
 
 It will be noticed that a few of these logograms are not 
 given position in strict accordance with the place of the 
 accented vowel of the words they represent. Thus, hope 
 is in the third position and do is in the second position. 
 These irregularities, which can not be allowed in the case 
 of regular word -forms, are permitted in logograms for greater 
 convenience in assigning the l)est working signs to the most 
 frequently-recurring words of the language. When a logo- 
 gram stands for two or more words, they are of such a nature 
 as not to clash. 
 
 \ 
 
 2 
 
 up 
 
 3 
 
 hope 
 
 2 
 
 be 
 
 I 
 
 time 
 
 2 
 
 it 
 
 3 
 
 at, out 
 
 I 
 
 dollar 
 
 2 
 
 do 
 
 / 
 
 1 each 
 
 2 which 
 
 3 much 
 
 2 advantage 
 
 3 large 
 
 1 common, kingdom 
 
 2 come 
 
 I give, given 
 
 2 together 
 
 3 had, advertise-ment 
 
 X 2 are 
 Exercise XXVII. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 ]-..v\^.' L ^^2.^1 4 
 
 !^ I ..^^ I ._x,\« 4 ~ : 
 
 t ^ 1-.. :v X ..:.K ^..^2...x,.i„...„\, ; i i :,, j. 
 
 ■N; - — ^ --k« 5 - ^ " - V^ I - .« 6/ 
 
 l\^„C^..Zi.„^^« ,L. _ ^ 
 
 ■X ^...^ /
 
 {/ocalization of R-outlines. 41 
 
 15 
 
 -j^-. 14..1 ^...xi^ /j:^ : C.l^.... /._. 
 
 1-. z....z\...^IL.I}.. ^...z\......~...L i6(. I/. 
 
 To be written in phonography. Write numerals with Arabic figures, ex- 
 cept so far as logograms are given for writing them. 
 
 1 . Food, fire, and a merry game are enough to cheer the life of a dull 
 chap. 2. They who ramble too far out of the path may take much time to 
 come back. 3. Take no unfair advantage to make a dollar. 4. They who 
 make the law of our day should know the law of an age ago. 5. Keep 
 to the path ; to come back to it may take up too much time. 6. They 
 who hope to enjoy much should be ready to do much to give joy. 7. They 
 who hope to be rich at sixty should lay by before thirty. 8. Give to a 
 mere game no time which should rightly be given to toil. 9. They who 
 give faith to mere common talk are like to be ill repaid. 10. The army 
 and navy of a kingdom may be large enough to ruin it. 11. Time enough 
 may be had by all who take time. 12. Take each advantage which may 
 fairly be had, but do nothing unfair. 13. They who know how to ad- 
 vertise may make much out of it. 14. No advertisement should take up 
 all the room on the page ; leave a gap or two.
 
 Lesson XI. — Downward-1 and Upward-sh. 
 
 49. Variable Direction of L and Sh. — Owing to 
 their peculiar slant, the strokes f and _J may be written 
 either upward or downward. When they stand alone, ( is 
 invariably written up and is named lay, and y is always 
 written down and is named isJi. When joined to another 
 stroke, ( may be written down, when it is named el, and ^ 
 may be written up, when it is named shay. Shay is, of 
 course, vocalized from the bottom. Compare par. 19 and 41. 
 
 50. Initial L. — ((?) When /begins a word, use lay. See 
 group 1 below. (/') When / is the first consonant in a 
 word and is preceded by a vowel, use el whenever it is fol- 
 lowed by a horizontal stroke (see group 2) ; (r) but in all 
 other cases use lay (see group 3). 
 
 51. Final L. — ((?) \\'hen / ends a word, use el if it is 
 preceded by *v_ ^ or /^, or by two consecutive vowels 
 one of which is accented. See group 4. (/;) In all other 
 cases use lay. See group 5. (r) When / is the last con- 
 sonant in a word and is followed by a vowel, use lay (see 
 group 6); (^/) except after -,_- and -s_^ when ^/should be used 
 (see group 7). 
 
 52. Medial L. — (<?) When /is medial in an outline, that 
 is, when it is both preceded and followed by a consonant, lay 
 is generally used (see group 8); (/^) but in some cases (es- 
 pecially before >^^) ^/ is used for greater convenience (see 
 group 9). 
 
 53. Initial Sh. — (<?) When sh is the first consonant in a 
 word and is followed by V^ V^ ( ( or lay, use sitay (sec 
 group 10); (/^) but in other cases use ish (see group 11). 
 
 42
 
 Dinvnward-l and Ipiuard-sh. 
 
 43 
 
 54. Final Sh. — (</) \\'licn sh is the last consonant in a 
 word and is preceded by | | V_ V. or cl, use sliav (see group 
 12); (/') but in other cases use ish (see group 13). 
 
 Exercise XXIX. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 f^ ^ R 
 
 - ^ ^ ^. ^ a. & O.. d.... O 
 
 ■fh- 
 
 ..C^... ^.., 
 
 2 -c ,^-c^ ^ C^..^..^ -Q... 
 
 3 ^-^^x. a.-^^ ^ -^ ^ 
 
 ■■f=\ 
 
 '& 
 
 r 
 
 ..__z <^:> ) / _ _ _ 
 
 X", v> ^ .:' ^ t: ^^... ,E r Z^. 
 
 v^ ^ ./<r r /- ^r^ vr cr 
 
 7 r zr.. 
 
 8 \rx ^^- \^...\/\^i
 
 44 The PI WHO graphic Amanuensis. 
 
 .oj^ A, A ^.L..I. I 
 
 II 
 
 :.^. ^ c<u. 
 
 ^3-^ N^ _y ^ "^ "^^-^ ^ 5 ^ S^ 
 
 Exercise XXX. 
 
 To be written in phonograpliy. 
 
 1. Lope, lij), lop, lady, latch, lodge, lake, lucky, like, leg, log, leaf, laugh, 
 leave, love, loath, lathe, lithe, lassie, Lizzie, lash, Lill, loyal, lower, loam, 
 lime, lamp, lion, logic, loyalty, launch, lounge, luggage, locked, locate. 
 
 2. Alike, alkali, Allegheny, alum, Elmira, Illinois, Oolong. 
 
 3. Elbow, Alloona, elegy, alive, alarming. 
 
 4. Fail, fill, befell, befall, veal, avail, unveil, nail, Nell, royal, Powell, 
 towel, jewel, Joel. 
 
 5. Pale, pill, ball, bill, tall, tool, dale, doll, chill, gill, cool, cull, gall, 
 ghoul, zeal, loll, loyal, mtal, mill, impel, nimble. 
 
 6. Polly, billow, tallow, dolly, ruilely, richly, callow, galley, fallow, fel- 
 low, volley, loyally, relay, thoroughly, mealy, mellow, nimbly. 
 
 7. Nealy, Manila, wrongly, vanilla. 
 
 8. r>ulb, ability, bilge, Malaga, delve, policy, militia, pillar. 
 
 9. Vellum, paling, billing, toohng, dulling, coiling, fdling, fooling, 
 kneeling. 
 
 10. Sheaving, .shaving, .sheathe, .shale, shoal, Shiloh, .shallow. 
 
 11. Shape, shop, showed, shadow, shake, shuck, shaggy, .share, shire, 
 shame, shiny. 
 
 12. Tush, dash, radish, ellish, ravish, foolish. 
 
 13. Ikish, rubbish, cash, gush, lash, abolish, rush, mash, ambush, gnash.
 
 Lesson XII. — Vocalization of L-outlines. 
 
 — Curved-stroke Logograms. — 
 
 Sentence-writing. 
 
 55. Initial and Final Vowels. — The rules for writing 
 the upward and downward forms of / enable us in sentence- 
 writing to dispense with writing the initial and final vowels 
 of many words affected by these rules. 
 
 56. Initial and Final Vowels Indicated. — When an 
 outline begins with cl we infer the presence of an initial 
 vowel ; when an outline ends with lay, we infer the pres- 
 ence of a final vowel ; and in either case it is, accord- 
 ingly, unnecessary actually to write the vowel. The few ex- 
 ceptions to this rule are in the cases of words like alp (see 
 par. 50 r) and Nelly (see par. 51 ^), in which the manner 
 of writing the stroke does not indicate whether or not there 
 is an initial or final vowel. In these cases the vowel should 
 be written in. 
 
 57. No Indication with Sh. — The rules for upward- and 
 downward-.?/! are not dependent on the relation of the stroke 
 to the vowels in any word, but are merely intended to assist 
 the writer in the formation of facile outlines. 
 
 58. Curved-stroke Logograms. — The following logo- 
 grams are derived from the curved consonant strokes : 
 
 I if, off r 2 think 
 
 V 2 for ^ 3 thank-ed, thousand 
 3 l^alf 2 them 
 
 I ever ^ 3 though 
 
 V - have 2 us 
 
 3 however ) 3 use (//.) 
 
 45
 
 46' 
 
 TJic PJionograpJiic Ainaintcnsis. 
 
 '' 3 use (7'.) 
 
 , 2 shall 
 
 -^ 3 issue 
 
 J 2 usual -ly 
 
 (^ 2 will 
 
 ^—^ 2 hini, am 
 
 I in, any 
 
 3 own 
 
 1 thing, long 
 
 2 young 
 
 3 owing 
 
 1 im|)Ortant, importance 
 
 2 im])rove-d, improvement 
 
 Exercise XXXI. 
 
 . { ,\C..^ . 
 
 .h 3( ..(....'..^ ) " - i 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 >" C 2.( J 
 
 ..^ ) - ) :Z ^ ^ 
 
 ^. ,( Ly^ ^^^^J 2^. 
 
 ^ ] : ( .....k_ 1 T...":^ ' - ^..^^^ ^ 
 
 r,.,.::: -j c: x .L. s...^,.. _..Z...r /.... 
 
 _ .X 
 
 — - rv_ 
 
 9(^ 
 
 ^ V 1 
 
 v^ 
 
 ,.._^.1_' ., 
 
 II.. ...^ \- ) 
 
 ' I .--^...y^LJs^z ^. ( v.;^ 
 
 : I. .3.- .^il^x ^ • -^ ^ ^' 
 
 ..-^^^L , 
 
 L ^ / 
 
 
 ■•( ^x- 
 
 ..^.. 
 
 ..z^., 
 
 -^ > 
 
 12 
 
 ^4* ) 
 
 -X 15^ 
 
 ^ ■ ^-^ 1 ^ L
 
 / \)calizatio}i of L-oiitlines. 47 
 
 Exercise XXXil. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 I. Death will come before long to all — to rich and poor altke. 2. I 
 am rich if I think I have enough. 3. To be of use should be the aim m 
 life of each of us. 4. Nothing so usual but may by time go out of use. 
 5. They who borrow nothing shall have nothing to pay back. 6. To them 
 who have much, much shall be given. 7. The debt which was owing to 
 the lamb was paid to the lion. 8. I ought to use much of each day for 
 my own mental and bodily improvement. 9. Live nghtly day by day, for 
 death may come at any time. 10. They do an ill thmg who add to a tale 
 already too long. 11. The young and foolish think nothing important but 
 to eat and be merry. 12. Each day and hour should be improved by the 
 young. 13. The fool will feel no love for them who aim to teach liim to 
 improve. 14. They who know a thing which may be of importance for 
 all to know, ought to keep nothing back. 15. They who make a debt may 
 have to toil long before they pay it off. 16. If I am in tlie wrong, I 
 ought to thank all who show me how to improve. 17. They who b.)rrow 
 but half may have to payback all. 18. They should be thanked who show 
 us our error. 19. If I am in the right and know it, I ought to keep to 
 it though a thousand say I am wrong. 20. No lie should ever issue out of 
 the mouth of any of us. 21. Tliey who keep right on to the goal will in 
 time reach it, however far off it may be.
 
 Lesson XIII.— W and Y —The Coales- 
 
 cents. 
 
 59. The Strokes W and Y. — JFandyave represented 
 in phonography \)y the two strokes "^ and ^, named way 
 andjaj. To these strokes vowels may be written just as to 
 any others : 7ciay ^T , zooe "^, woo ~^y, away ^V , yea Z^- 
 
 60. The Coalescent Vowel-signs. — In addition to 
 these strokes a series of vowel-like signs is provided to repre- 
 sent the combination, or coalescence, of w and y with the 
 vowels. The long vowels may be arranged as a natural scale 
 or series, as follows : 
 
 e \ ''1' "/' I ajv I o |— 00 I 
 The coalescence of w with these six vowels is written thus: 
 
 7ue *^| zva cl 7oah \ icnna ^1 700 J 7000 I 
 
 I I c| I I al 
 
 and the coalescence of y with the same vowels is written : 
 
 ye ^\ ya J va/i I va7c> "I yo A yoo I 
 These coalescent-signs, it must be observed, are shaded to 
 correspond to the heavy long vowels. The same signs, writ 
 ten light, correspond to the six short vowels: 
 
 / \ i' 1 '' I '"^ I '' ~i ''"'' 
 
 7iu '^\ we cl 7c>a I 7C'(> ^1 701) d| 7000 I 
 
 y'l ^1 _;'(' ul yd I yi) ''I yi'i r.\ yoo \ 
 
 /Falso coalesces with the di])hthong ""' and the combination 
 is rei)rc.scntcd by the sign [. 
 
 61. Direction of Coalescent Vowel-signs. — These 
 compound signs are here placed to the stroke | for the sake 
 
 48
 
 W and Y — TJie Coalcscents. 49 
 
 of illustration, hut, like the vowels and the true diphthongs, 
 they may he written to any stroke. Like the diphthongs 
 (compare par. 30 /^), they do not accommodate themselves to 
 direction of the adjacent stroke. The 7C'-signs always open 
 to the right and left, and the j'-signs always open up and 
 down, no matter to what stroke they are placed. Thus, 
 
 7Lioof v., yore \ 
 
 62. Joined Coalescent Vowel-signs. — The coalescent- 
 signs of the first and third position may, like the diphthong- 
 signs (compare par. 31), be joined to the adjacent consonant 
 stroke without lifting the pen, whenever they form a distinct 
 
 angle with the stroke, as in ^oalk , yawl ^ -..., few \^ 
 
 63. Rules for the Use of the Strokes and Vowel- 
 signs. — ((/) \\ hen a word hegins with w or )■, use the 
 coalescent-sign if it can be joined at a distinct angle (see 
 group I below); but (/>) if the coalescent-sign can not be so 
 joined, then use the stroke (see group 2), except (r) in the 
 few cases in which neither the coalescent-sign nor the stroke 
 makes a good joining, when the disjoined coalescent-sign 
 should be used (see group 3). (^/) If a word begin with 
 a vowel followed by w or y, the stroke form must be used. 
 See group 4. (^) When w ox y \% medial, the coales- 
 cent-sign is generally used. See group 5. (/) Kfiist-pltxce 
 coalescent-sign may be joined medially when it makes a con- 
 venient angle with both strokes. See group 6. (^i,--) The 
 coalescent-sign is always used at the end of words, joined if 
 possible. See group 7. 
 
 64. New, Now. — The frequently-recurring word ne7v 
 (^knew^ is irregularly vocalized by writing the coalescent- 
 sign backwards, and slightly displaced, for convenience in 
 joining, thus - ^. In like manner now is written with the 
 
 4
 
 50 TJic PJionograpJiic Ammiucusis. 
 
 dii)hthong-sign reduced to its second half, thus . ^. Both 
 
 these words are written on the line (in the second position), 
 and are, in effect, partly-vocalized logograms. 
 
 Exercise XXXIII. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 1 f v, - !■ / ( f \Y r 
 
 X^ ?f 1 > ^ ^ ■ 
 
 Exercise XXXIV, 
 To be written in phonogiapliy. 
 
 1. Weedy, weaving, wit, widow, wilclu-ry, wisli, wasli, wide, wiie, 
 V<irk. 
 
 2. Wipe, wait, wet, wed, wooed, wage, walce, wick, wag, wanipiun. 
 wavy, waving, wiidc, yoke, Vale, yam, yacht. 
 
 3. Woof, youtli, Euiope, Yankee, yelk, Eugenia, eiipliony. 
 
 4. Awoke, awaic. 
 
 5 Esquire, beauty, lure, duke, cube, fume, rebuke, dupe, cubic, oc 
 cupy, puny, tulip, Cuba, tunic. 
 
 6. Unweaving, outwit, jiigweed. 
 
 7. View, tlievv, endue, ague, imbue, ncpliew, review, :\(lieu. undue
 
 Lesson XIV. — H —The Aspirate. 
 
 65. The Stroke. — //is written in phonography with the 
 stroke ^^. This stroke is ahvays written up, at the same 
 skint as ray, the small hook being made first. Like the up- 
 ward strokes ray, lay and shay, the stroke-// is vocalized from 
 the bottom because it is written from the bottom ; thus, 
 
 hay /^ , ha -^^, June . ^-■~, hoe <<^ , h(i;;h , hf/e /^. 
 
 66. The Tick. — AVhen / begins a word and is followed 
 by /c, ^, s, z, lay, ar, //i, i/ip or 7C', it is represented by a light, 
 short tick, struck down in the direction of ch. See group i. 
 
 by. The Stroke. — When // begins a word and is followed 
 by any stroke other than those mentioned in the last para- 
 graph, the stroke should be used. See group 2. 
 
 68. The Dot. — When h is medial, that is to say, when it 
 has one or more consonants jjrececiing and following it, it is 
 regularly represented by a dot placed beside the sign of the 
 following vowel. See group 3. When the dot is placed to a 
 dash vowel, it is written at its side rather than at its end. 
 When it is placed to a dot vowel it should be so placed that 
 a line connecting the two dots may be at right angles to the 
 stroke to which they are placed. The dot aspirate is also 
 used at the beginning of words whenever // precedes a joined 
 coalesccnt-sign. See group 4. 
 
 69. The Tick. — Although the dot is the normal form of 
 medial //, the tick is used, because more convenient, when- 
 ever it forms an acute angle with both the preceding and 
 following strokes. See group 5. 
 
 51
 
 52 The PJionograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 70. The Stroke. — When a word begins with a vowel im- 
 mediately followed by //, the stroke form must be used. See 
 group 6. 
 
 71. Phonetic Spelling.— The student may at first find 
 some difficulty with words like why, whey, and other words 
 which begin with wh in the ordinary spelling. This difficulty 
 will disappear as soon as he recognizes the fact that the true 
 natural order of these two sounds is h7v, that %ohy is really 
 hw'i, and 7ohcy is really InuCi. 
 
 Exercise XXXV. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 Exercise XXXVI. 
 
 To be written in plionogiaphy. 
 
 I. Hack, hectic, hackney, hag, hug, liale, liall, liill, luillmv, Iiowl, 
 liome, humming, whom, ham, hemlock, hare, hurl, Hiram, herb, hussy, 
 hemp, whey, whack.
 
 // — The Aspirate. 53 
 
 2. Heap, happy, hop, hobby, Haiti, heed, hoed, liitcli, liu^e, liavoc, 
 hush, honey, liinye, hang, harrow, I hiny, hewer, hearty, hardy, hurrah- 
 ing, harrowed. 
 
 3. Hardihood, Bohemia, eoaliu)le, Mohawk, outhouse, icehouse, white- 
 head, alcohol. 
 
 4. White, wheat, whit, Whitlow, buckwheat. 
 
 5. Inhume, unhook, inhumanity, cohere, unhealthily. 
 
 6. Oho, CJhio, alieap.
 
 Lesson XV. — Phrase-writing. — The 
 Ticks ''The," "A," "An," "And." 
 
 72. The Ticks. — The words tlic, a, an, and are of very 
 frequent recurrence, and are often written in ])honography by 
 means of a short tick joined to the outline of the next pre- 
 ceding or following word or grammalogue. The ticks are 
 unshaded and are about as long as a vowel dash — that is, one- 
 fourth the length of the stroke | . 
 
 73- Tick-the. — {a) The tick-///6' is joined to the //rr^'^////^ 
 
 word only. After the strokes ,\ \ ^ V. ( ( 
 
 ----- ^—^ X '^''fl after vowel logograms of corresponding 
 directions, the tick-///r is struck dino/i in the direction of ch. 
 
 Exercise XXXVII. 
 
 Pay-the, by-the, be-the, ship-the, reap-the, rob-the, take-the, make-the, 
 knock-the, give-lhe, beg-the, dig-the, if-tlie, forllie, half-the, liave-llie, 
 however-the, move-the, think-the, thank-tlic, hoili the, lliough-llie, in the, 
 know-the, own-the, ruin-the, along-the, hangthc, arc-tlie, Inn y tlic, ixar- 
 the, of-the, to-the, on-the, should-tlie, all-the. 
 
 (/O After the strokes | | // '1 ) ^y, ,^'^>^, and 
 after vowel logograms of corresponding directions, the tick-///t' 
 is struck uj) in the direction of ray. 
 
 54
 
 The Ticks ''TJicy "./," 'v7///' ''Andy 55 
 
 Exerci-,e XXXVIII. 
 
 /4 N I . v , A \ ^ / > 
 
 b ^-.^ 4 ^ i-v ^ ^ ^ / ^ ^ > ^■■^■ 
 
 1 1 ^ 1.1 J 
 
 \ y c ; ^ ^ 
 
 \^...:\.... 
 
 \^ /- 
 
 At-the, write-the, beat-the, do-thc, liad-tlie, i)ai(l-the, wliicli tlie, leach- 
 the, toucli-thc, catch-the, judge-tlie, seethe, say-thc, \vas-tlie, use-tlie, 
 shall the, issue-tlie, usually-tlie, hear tlie, share-tlie, fear-tlie, niay-the, 
 name-the, irnprove-the, dump the, weigh-tlie, why-tlie, or-the, but-the, 
 already-tlie, before-lhe, ought the. 
 
 (r) It will be seen that the i\ck-flic is always struck in the 
 direction which enables it to form the more acute angle with 
 the stroke to which it is joined. 
 
 74. The Tick-a-an-and. — {a) The iick-(i'-ri'//-(7//r/ is 
 
 joined to \\\c/oncnoiiig \\oy(\, and is written in the direction 
 
 of — . 
 
 Exercise XXXIX. 
 
 And-it, and-at, a-time, a-tool, a-dollar, a-day, and-do, and-liad, and- 
 each, and-wliich, and-much, a-cliair, an-advantage, a-judge, a-large, and- 
 for, a-few, a-half, and-ever, and-have, and-however, a-view, and-think, 
 and-thank, a-thousand, a-youth, and-they, and-tliem, and-though, and- will, 
 a-law, a-life, and-the. 
 
 . 75. When the Ticks Cannot be Used. — In no case 
 can any tick be joined so as to form an obtuse angle with 
 the stroke to which it is attached. To avoid snch cases the 
 dot forms of fhr, a, an' and, must l)e used. 
 
 76. Of-the. — In sentence-writing, when the words of the 
 occur between two nouns, they may be omitted altogether,
 
 56 TJic PJionographic Auianucnsis, 
 
 and their presence indicated by writing the outlines of the 
 nouns close together. Do not however use proximity to 
 represent of-thc when one of the two nouns is a vowel, diph- 
 thong, or coalescent grammalogue. (vSee paragraph 77.) 
 
 Exercise XL. 
 
 Titne-of-the-day, duty-of-the-hour, day-of the-week, top-of-tlie-hill, edge- 
 of-the-knife, valley-of-tlie-Nile, march-of-the-eneniy, caigo-of-the ship, 
 l)ower-of-the-judge, top-of-liie-page, lily-of-the-valley, cock-of- the- walk, 
 fall-of-the-leaf.
 
 Lesson XVI.— W, Y, and H Logograms. 
 — Sentence-writing. 
 
 77. The Logograms. — The following logograms are de- 
 rived from the signs which represent 70, y and // : 
 
 C C 3 
 
 we with c were what 3 would, wood 
 
 o yet be)'ond ^ jou 
 
 ^.. I year 
 ^ 2 your 
 .'. he 
 
 78. Directions for Writing. — We, with, what, beyond 
 and he rest on the upper line; all others on the lower line. 
 He is in the direction of cli, and, like it, is written down. In 
 theory the logograms for we and you, being long vowels, are 
 heavy, but in i)ractise it is unnecessary to shade them. 
 
 79. Logograms and Joined Ticks. — ^The ticks the, 
 a, ail, aiid]0\\\ with these logograms as follows: 
 
 Exercise XLI. 
 
 r 
 
 .c 
 
 1. Wiih-the, were-the, what-the, would-tlie, yet the, beyond-the, you- 
 the. 
 
 2. And-we, and witli, and-weie, and yet, and-beyond, and-you, a-year, 
 and-your, and-he. 
 
 57
 
 58 TJic PJionograpJiic Aniaiiuciisis. 
 
 Exercise XLII. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 ^ ^ c. .uz:.. r 
 
 rv 
 
 r. 
 
 ^.. L 
 
 3( \ ^. 
 
 V. • ' - - 
 
 ,^- : ^ ~ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 -^ ^ 1 A ' \ 1 L ^' ■ ' \ 
 
 ^x Lj^ 4 ■'■ ■=> -^ ^ ' — ■"''^ ^ 
 
 ^ i ,., ^ ' ^ 
 
 1 
 
 ,6. J .,„ 
 
 i- ^ 1, - 
 
 r .■ _ >^ ^„.. 
 
 7 = 1 ^ -: " L~-^ I ■ ^- )^ :^-- 
 
 ^...^ : r-)....' /^...l-.) '^ ^ I ^ r 
 
 r ' ■ ■) ' / 
 
 ) 
 
 : C..rz^. 
 
 1 
 
 V. 
 
 x ^^...x ^.,.^: _. 
 
 ^ ^ - -^■■' " 
 
 / 
 
 1 ^ ^ / ^ 
 
 / 
 
 .\ 
 
 ..,.11..,,^ c. 
 
 1 
 
 X 
 
 Exercise XLIII. 
 
 'I be written in plionograpliy. Join the words connected liy liypliens. 
 
 I. Keep a-diary and write in it wliat you do each (hiy ; do nothing but 
 wliat you would wish to write in your diary. 2. If you touch pitdi it will 
 defile you ; if you keep with a rogue you will have an ill name. 3. How-
 
 J!\ ]' ////</ If Looooranis. 59 
 
 ever rich we may In-, we have yet a-cUbt to jiay wliitli will lake all we 
 have. 4. We make much use of-the wood of-the oak, ash, eini, beech, 
 hickory, and-the like. 5. Live your life day by day, and-fiU each day with 
 use and beauty. 6. Have nt) fear for-the morrow ; you will be happy 
 enough now and Iuto if you but give heed to-tlie duty (of-the) day and 
 hour. 7. Why should we bear so much of ill here on earth but to make 
 ready for a-lifc to come? S. I )o each duty in your own home in-tlie way 
 in which you would do it if the eyes of the whole earth were on you. 
 9. They are weak and-foolish wlio fail to look beyond-the day. 10. lie 
 who would be rich in a hurry may merely hurry to jail. 11. Look ahead 
 all you will, how may you know what a-year will give to you or take away? 
 12. We should do each duty with ease if we but knew the right way 
 to do it.
 
 Lesson XVII. — Phrase-writing. 
 
 80. Phrase-writing. — One of the most effective time- 
 saving features of phonograjjhy is the expression of several 
 words by a single outline, called phrase-turiting. The most 
 useful, indeed the only phrases which are highly useful, are 
 formed out of the commonest words of the language. Phrase- 
 forms are, therefore, largely made up by the joining of logo- 
 grams with each other or with the outlines of other common 
 words. 
 
 81. Requisites of Phrase-forms. — Th order that words 
 may be joined in phrases the following conditions must be 
 observed : 
 
 a. The outlines mu.st join conveniently. It must be an 
 easier matter to write them joined than it would be to write 
 them separately. 
 
 b. The words out of which phrases are formed must go 
 naturally together — there must be a logical and grammatical 
 connection between them. 
 
 c. Phrases must not be made too long — they should not 
 contain so many words as to be cumbersome, nor should they 
 run far above or below the line of writing. The most useful 
 phrases contain two and three words. A few useful ones con- 
 tain four and five words, but they are rare. 
 
 82. Position of Phrases. — ((/) The general rule for 
 the placing of i)hrases with res]:)ect to the line of writing is 
 to give the first word of the phrase the same position it would 
 occupy if standing alone. See group i below^ (/^ Some- 
 times, though comjjaratively seldom, the first word accommo- 
 
 60
 
 PJirasc- Wriiiiior. 
 
 6i 
 
 dates itself to the position of the second, in cases in \vhi( h it 
 is necessary that the latter should have its own position in 
 order that it may be legil)le. See group 2 below. 'I'he word 
 Jic, when it begins a phrase, is uniformly accommodated to 
 the position of the following word. See group 3 below. 
 
 83. Conflicting Words. — The logogram any may l)e 
 used in [)hrase-writing only at the beginning of a phrase. If 
 joined as the second word it would clash with no. Thus, 
 
 the phrase _ J... reads in-no-way and not /n-any-7C'av. 
 
 Similarly nu- must not be written as the second word of a 
 phrase, or it would clash with ///>//. V^— ^ reads /or-//ini and 
 not /or-n/r. And, in general, when the same outline stands 
 for two or more conflicting words, only the second-position 
 outline may be joined as the second word in phrase -writing. 
 The first- and third-position outlines must be disjoined. 
 
 Exercise XLIV. 
 
 r.....z: z2\... 
 
 
 n :ajA^ v_ v^%...ii 1...^ ^ k^ e:x 
 
 J I ^._ 
 
 1 11^ 
 
 r 
 
 \V ''"^zt r 
 
 \j:.. k.z:Nv v_/. ^..,
 
 62 TJic PJionograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 1. You- will, you-will-be, you-will-do, you-may, you-may-make, you-are, 
 you-aie-right, you-are-ready, you-should, you-should be, youshould-do, 
 you-know, you-know-nolliing, you-have, you-have-it, you-have-them, you- 
 makc, you-make-them, you-come, you-go, you-fail, you-reach, we-do, we- 
 do-so,-\ve-liave, we-have-them, we-have-it, we-think, we-tliink-so, we-think- 
 you-are, we-shall, we-sliall-be, we-shall-be-ready, we-shall-do, we-take, 
 we take-tliem, we-fear, we-fear-you-are, we-fear-you-will, I-have, I-have-it, 
 I-have-lhem, I-do, l-do-so, I-had, I-had-them, I-shall, I-shall-be, I-shall- 
 be-ready, I-know, I-know-it, I- know-it- was, I-fear, I-fear-you-will, I-fear- 
 youare, I-paid, I-take, I-take-them, I-say, I-say-so, it-will, it-will-be, it- 
 will-have, it-may, it-may-make, it-should, it should-be, it-should-have, it- 
 would, it- would be, it-would-make, it-was, it-was-ready, it-was-right, for- 
 them, for-your, for-him, for-her, of-it, of-them, of-your, of-him, of-her, 
 of-our, with-it, with-them, with-your, wilh-her, at-the, at-your, to-it, to- 
 thcm, to-your, to him, to-her, to-our, on-it, on them, on your, on-her, 
 before-them, before-your, before-him, beforeour, for-it, for-it-was, for-it- 
 may, for-it-would-make, for-you-will, for-you-will be, for-you-aie, if you- 
 will, if-you-will-be, if-you-are, ifit-was, if-it-would, ifit-wf)uldbe, but you- 
 wiil, but-you-will-be, but you-are, or-you-will, or-you-will-be, or-you-are^ 
 how-you-are, how-you-will, how-you-may, to-take, to-take-them, to-do, to- 
 do-so, to-judge, to-come, to go, to-fear, to-have, to-have-them, to-think, 
 to-think-so, to-look, to-reach, to-make, to-improve. 
 
 2. Of-each, of-which, of-much, in-each, in-which, in-much, with-each, 
 with-which, with-much, on-each, on-which, on-much. 
 
 3. lie-was, he-was-right, he-was-ready, he-would, hc-would-be, he- 
 would-have, he-will, he-will-be, he-will-be-rcady, he-should, he-should-be, 
 he-should-know.
 
 Lesson XVIII. — Contractions. 
 
 84. Contractions. — The outlines of certain tonniion 
 words would he too long for practical convenience if written 
 in full. Such outlines are therefore abbreviated by the 
 omission of one or more consonants. The resulting cli[)t 
 outlines are, for convenience, called " contractions." The 
 following list should be thoroughly memorized. It will be 
 noted that a contraction which serves for a primitive word 
 may often serve also for one or more of its derivatives. 
 
 V 
 
 
 L 
 
 7 
 
 acknowledge 
 
 bank 
 
 change-d 
 
 electric-ity 
 
 English 
 
 February 
 
 influential 
 
 irregular 
 
 January 
 
 knowledge 
 
 length 
 
 machinery 
 
 magazine 
 manufactured 
 
 63
 
 64 The PJioiwgrapJiic Auianiicnsis. 
 
 Exercise XLV. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 ^-] ' ^ ly.-.- ^/--^..X I :....u_..x 
 
 X 
 
 >^>c 2: 
 
 1 
 
 5 :-:.-^^.-\ 
 
 7...r: I : ::^..._ _ ...X-^ U ' ^-. 
 
 :^.r-..^-^\^L.r zi: ^. ,.^ 
 
 ...-^....^ 2r^....rv. io.L.„......z^J.v^ /. 
 
 ^^.^A. xx.._.J J rur ...^..^ L_.. 
 
 ..^-..- >....:^..-^....3-.. 
 
 ^ >. 12. 
 
 i :^..' : \.. 
 
 i 
 
 /^ 
 
 .15.. 
 
 J4-. 
 
 r 
 
 rv; 
 
 ,..j.>^. 16 \ 
 
 ^.._...2vi...........^.^ ^. 
 
 ^ V > \ 
 
 ^ ' ••■•■'X- 
 
 „.k...i2iJ : 
 
 ■/) 
 
 X 
 
 19 
 
 ..l8....v„.X....^ ) .V. 
 
 ■i- X: t 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^^^iX^x 2Q 
 
 ,^ 
 
 .21 
 
 Z^i. ^,.22 '....CS.::!!....!!^
 
 Coiifracfiojis. 65 
 
 Exercise XLVI. 
 
 To be written in phonot^iajjliy. WOids connected by hyphens are (o be 
 joined as phrases. 
 
 I. Virginia was-the early home (of-tlie) Enghsh on a new shore. 
 2. Tlie kingdom of-Italy may be represented on a map in-the pecuhar form 
 of a boot. 3. Keei^ fiitli willi all whom-you-may-have to-represent in any 
 pubhc affair. 4. If-we Uve a regular life we-shall-be in a-fair-way of living 
 lung and ha[)i)ily ; if an irregular life, we may live unhappily and die early. 
 
 5. Keep each thing for-the regular use to- which it-should-be given. 
 
 6. Give no heed to-them who-say an-ill thing, but-rather aim to-manage 
 your own tongue aright. 7. A thing may long be your own, and yet you- 
 may-have to give it up for-the-use (of the) public. 8. Unlike-the irregular 
 month of-February, January and November are of unvarying length. 
 9. If I-have any peculiar mental or bodily power, I ought to-make-it an ob- 
 ject of-my-life to-take-advantage of-it and to use it. 10. Oil, tobacco and 
 machinery are all manufactured in a-large way in <^Miio. 11. We bake coal 
 to-manufacture coke. 12. If-we-take a magazine by-the year, it ought to 
 be-read month by-month. 13. Pursue knowledge all-your life long — 
 in youth and in age. 14. The cashier will watch-the cash in-the bank, 
 but who-will watch-the cashier? 15. I would wish to live a-life which- 
 should-be influential for high living in-all who-may come to know me. 
 16. Year by-year we come by new knowledge of how to-make use of- 
 electricity. 17. Day by day, week by week, month by-month and year 
 by-year we allow our time to-go by us, and-we-feel no-change; but an 
 hour will come to each of us, like an electric shock, in-which we-shall- 
 acknowledge our age, and know our youth will never come back to us. 
 18. If-we-have-never changed our view of-life, we-have-never paid a-duty 
 we owe to-our youth. 19. A regular way of living will-be of-advantage 
 to-him who-would-be happy.
 
 Lesson X IX. — P hrase-writing. — Varied 
 Forms. 
 
 85. Varied Forms. — For the sake of greater conven- 
 ience, a few common words may l)e written in phrase-writing 
 with forms slightly varied from the outlines usually employed 
 in writing them. 
 
 86. He. — The tick-//, used as a logogram for he, which 
 in phrase-writing is usually, and when standing alone is in- 
 variably, written down, may be struck upward in phrase-writ- 
 ing if a better joining is thereby obtained. Like the down- 
 ward form, it accommodates itself to the jjosition of the 
 following word. See group i. 
 
 87. I. — The logogram for / ^' may be reduced to its first 
 stroke whenever a better joining or briefer outline is thereby 
 obtained. See group 2. 
 
 88. How. — The logogram for how a may, at the begin- 
 ning of phrases, be reduced to its first stroke whenever a 
 better joining or briefer outline is thereby obtained. See 
 group 3. 
 
 89. You. — The logogram for you o may, in the middle 
 or at the end of phrases, be written inverted whenever a bet- 
 ter joining is thereby obtained. See group 4. 
 
 90. Restored Forms. — The word time, when joined in 
 phrases, should be restored to its full form L — ., as the logo- 
 gram is not usually legible when taken out of its position by 
 joining. In like manner, much may be restored to its full 
 form / whenever a convenient joining is thereby obtained- 
 See group 5. 
 
 66
 
 PJirase-ivriting. — Varied Forms. 
 
 67 
 
 91. May-be. — The phrase may-be is written with the 
 Ftroke ^'-N. See group 6. 
 
 92. To-be. — The phrase io-be is written irregularly with 
 the stroke >v ... in the third position. See group 7. 
 
 Exercise XLVII. 
 
 -^..^rrr^..,-^^ 11 I. -...L~< 1 L_^ \ ...X 
 
 J 
 
 .V 
 
 .rj.^ 1 13 1 1 ic.. k:x. 
 
 .,-^' .^-y\ ^-_ .__ 
 
 W- 
 
 7 ^^v-^
 
 68 TJic PJionographic Aiuaimeiisis. 
 
 1. He-shall, he-shall-be, he-shall-have, he-had, he had-the, he-took, he- 
 took-the, he-changed, he-fed, he-thanked, he-thanked -you, he-issued, he- 
 knew, he-paid, he-bought, may-he, niay-he-have, may-he-take, had-he, 
 had-he-never, which-he, which-he-knew, so-he, so-he-knew, so-he-took, 
 was-he, was-he-nevcr, bhall-he, shall-he-have, shall-he-have-them, should-he, 
 should-he-be. 
 
 2. I-will, I-\vill-be, I-\vill-do, I-will-do-so, I-think, I-think-so, I-think- 
 you-will, I-think-you-will-be, I-thank, I-thank-you, I-thank-them, I-am, 
 I-am-ready, I-am-right, I-make, I-caine, I-go, I-acknowledge, I-change, 
 I-charge. 
 
 3. Ilow-do-you, how-do-you-know, how-have-your, liow-have-they, how- 
 shali, how-shall-you, how-shall-ynu-nuike, how-were, how-were-they, how- 
 it-was, how-it-may, how-they, how-they-were, how-they-have, how-long, 
 how-long-ago, how-much, how-large, how-far, how-he, how-he-was, how- 
 we, how-we-have, how-we-were. 
 
 4. For-you, for-you-have, for-you-know, if-you, if-you-have, if-you-know, 
 have-you, have-you-never, have-you-enough, will-you-be, will-you-do, will- 
 you-do-so, are-you, are-you-never, I-know-you, I-know-you-have, should- 
 you, should-you-be, should-you-know, should-you-have. 
 
 5. In-time, no-time, you-are-in-time, are-you-in-time, take-time, enough- 
 time, long-time, long-tinie-ago, on-time, half-time, if-you-have-time, so- 
 much, was-much, I-am-much, too-much. 
 
 6. May-be, you-may-be, you-may-be-right, you-may-be-wrong, you-may- 
 be-ready, he-may-be, he-may-be-right, I-may-be, I-may-be-wrong, I-hope- 
 you-may-be, it-may-be, it-may-be-right, I-think-it-may-be, each-may-be, 
 which-may-be, much-may-be, all-may-be, who-may-be. 
 
 7. To-be-right, to-be-wrong, to-be-ready, to-be-allowed, to-be-rich, to- 
 be-much, to-be- willing.
 
 Lesson XX. — Compound Words. — Dis- 
 joined Affixes. 
 
 93. Compound Words. — Compound words are usually 
 written in phonography as phrases (which they really are) 
 without lifting the pen. See group i below. 
 
 94. Grammalogue Compounds. — (<?) Logograms are 
 occasionally joined to one another to form compounds. See 
 group 2. In such cases the general rule is to put the first 
 logogram in the position it would occupy if standing alone, 
 while the second accommodates itself to the position of the 
 preceding. (Compare par. 82 <?.) {l>) Logograms are fre- 
 quently compounded with complete outlines of words without 
 lifting the pen. See group 3. Here the general rule is that 
 the logogram shall occupy its own position and the joined 
 word must accommodate itself to the position of the logo- 
 gram. This rule is not, however, absolutely invariable. See, 
 for instance, the outline for the word forthwitJi. (r) Logo- 
 grams are also sometimes similarly compounded with forma- 
 tive affixes the outlines for which are accommodated to the 
 position of the logograms. See group 4. 
 
 95. The Hyphen. — It sometimes ha{)pens that the (^\t- 
 ments of a compound word do not join conveniently, or they 
 may form long and awkward outlines if joined. In such ca.ses 
 they may, for greater convenience, be disjoined, the two 
 parts being connected by the phonographic hyphen ( = ). 
 See group 5 below. Outlines of this kind are frequently 
 written in practise without the hyphen, the two parts of 
 
 69
 
 JO The PJwnograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 the compound word being written a little closer together 
 than usual. 
 
 96. Disjoined Affixes. — Certain frequently-recurring af- 
 fixes are conveniently represented in phonography by special 
 signs which are disjoined from the outline of the main word 
 or stem. 
 
 97. Ing. — The syllable -ing may be represented by a light 
 dot placed at the end of a stroke. The dot form of -ing 
 should be used after outlines which end («) with any of the 
 strokes ) ^ ^ J f ^ ^ (see group 6), or (/') with any 
 straight stroke except y"^ and ^ (see group 7). After the 
 strokes V_^ ( ( ""- ^^ ^-_> ^^ downward f, upward ), and 
 the straight strokes / and ^^ , the stroke ^■^^ may be con- 
 veniently joined, and is to be preferred to the dot. See 
 group 8. The words />ei//g and 7oi/Iiiig, however, for practical 
 reasons, especially because of their better adaptation to phrase- 
 writing, are written with the outlines ^v^- and / 
 
 98. Ing-the. — When the follows a word ending with a dot- 
 tng, i/ig-f/te may be expressed by writing the i\ck-the disjoined 
 and in the position of the dot. See group 9. After // ) ) 
 _y J the disjoined tick may be struck in the direction of \. 
 
 See group 10. 
 
 99. Con, Com. — The syllable co>i- or com- may be repre- 
 sented by a light dot placed at the beginning of any stroke. 
 See group 11. This dot should be written before the out- 
 line for the stem word is written. Whenever either of these 
 syllables occurs in the middle of a Avord, that is, whenever it 
 is preceded by another prefix, the -con- or -com- is omitted 
 and the portion of the word which precedes it is written near 
 the beginning of the stem-outline. See group 12.
 
 Coin pound JFo7'r/s. — Disjoined Affixes. 71 
 
 Exercise XLVIII. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 ^K ^ 
 
 ..3:.,.n_... 
 
 'i ' ^ 
 
 \Pk U VI ^"^ \ 
 
 J. ^^..^^^^ /^ I. 
 
 ^ ' ) ^^^ -^ 
 
 C/ L.. 
 
 9 -v 
 
 
 ■r^- 
 
 A. 
 
 X\. 
 
 ffc 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,.v^ •CA..L\....^,:=v...^ I 
 
 ^ ^- ^-^ ^ ^ 
 
 k. ^ 
 
 <L_ 
 
 
 7^- 
 
 12 
 
 
 a 
 
 ■^ ~^^ ^b
 
 72 TJie Phonographic Anianuciisis. 
 
 Exercise XLIX. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Fellow-feeHng, fire-arm, lamp-chimney, wrong-doer, root-beer, week- 
 day, life-time, ladylike, fishing-boat. 
 
 2. Would-be, although, altogether, anything, become, all-important. 
 
 3. Wood-duck, wood-pulp, anyway, to-morrow, upright, half-fare, 
 long-time, uprear, became, outweigh, outride, outwit. 
 
 4. Advantageous, unusual, youngish, unimproved, unimportant, largely, 
 undo. 
 
 5. Fire tower, poor-farm, toothpick, torpedo-tube. 
 
 6. Essaying, laying, sharing, pouring, seeing, easing, showing, rushing, 
 lying, airing, pairing, woaing. 
 
 7. Obeying, eating, aiding, hedging, hooking, moping, ranging, dating, 
 ebbing, harping, itching, looking, perching, revoking, undoing, waiting, 
 wiping, reaping, pitying, going. 
 
 8. Vying, piling, ringing, cooling, failing, leaving, yelling, defying, 
 shaving, bathing, writhing, ravishing, chiming, pumping, camping, deny- 
 ing, banging, burrowing, marrying, hoeing. 
 
 9. ]!uying-the, packing-the, shadowing-the, attacking-the, begging-the, 
 endowing-the, hiding-the, jarring-the, kicking-the, rubbing-the, shearing- 
 thc, unbarring-the. 
 
 10. Watching-the, managing-the, dodging-the, ])atching-the, seeing-the, 
 pursuing-the, using-the, showing-the, pushing-the. 
 
 11. Condemn, concoct, condemning, condoler, confab, conform, con- 
 formity, congenial, contaminate, continual, continued, conveying, convoke, 
 combat, commodity, commune, compare, compelling, compiler. ' 
 
 12. Unconformity, accommodate, recommit, reconvey, unconforming, 
 re-convoke.
 
 Lesson XXI. — The Circle-s-z. 
 
 100. Circle-S and -z.— ^ and z recur very much more fre- 
 quently than most of the other consonants, and for that reason 
 it is desirable that they should be represented by an additional 
 sign, briefer than the strokes already given. For this purpose a 
 small circle o is used. It is joined to any one of the alpha- 
 betic strokes to represent either s or z. Attached to straight 
 strokes, it is written with motion contrary to that of the 
 
 hands of the clock, thus : ps \j, ts [,, cJi-s I , ks o, rs X ; 
 
 sp \ , st I , s-ili / , sk a , sr o/ . 
 
 loi. Evolute and Involute Motion. — This kind of 
 motion is, for convenience, called involute motion. The con- 
 trary motion, which is like that of the hands of the clock, is 
 called cvoliite motion. In joining the circle-.v to curved 
 strokes, the circle takes the motion of the curve to which it is 
 attached, involute or evolute as the case may be, thus: /yVx-, 
 ths \s, ss d, shs uy. Is f , rs d, >/is ^—q, ns ^s-, sf V , sth v, 
 
 ss J, s-s/i _y, slC , sr \ s>/i j5-^, sn q_,. The circle-j- is at- 
 tached to the heavy strokes in exactly the same way as to 
 light ones, but is itself not shaded. 
 
 102. Vocalization of Outlines Containing- Circles. — 
 
 In vocalizing, that is to say, in placing the vowels to, out- 
 lines in which the circle-j- or -z is used, the unvarying rule 
 is that the vowels are written and read with reference to the 
 
 n
 
 74 The PJionograpJiic Amamicnsis. 
 
 stroke and not with reference to the circle, to which a vowel 
 can never be placed. Thus : 
 
 -. •/ 
 
 r\ 
 
 pay toe gay age oar ale 
 
 L- 
 
 f 
 
 •> 
 
 pace toes gaze sage soar sale 
 
 103. Rules for Writing the Circle and Stroke 
 Forms of S and Z, — (^a) When a word ends with s or 
 z, use the circle (see group i below); except (/') when the s 
 or z is preceded by two consecutive vowels, one of which is 
 accented, in which case the stroke should be used. See 
 group 2. (r) When a word begins with s, use the circle 
 (see group 3); except (//) when the s is followed by two 
 consecutive vowels, one of which is accented, in which case 
 the stroke should be used. See group 4. (<") W^hen a word 
 ends with a vowel preceded by .v or s, use the stroke. See 
 grouj) 5. (/) When a word begins with a vowel followed 
 by s or z, use the stroke. See group 6. {g') When a word 
 begins with z, use the stroke. See group 7. 
 
 104. Medial S and Z. — ANhen .f (or :;) occurs in the 
 middle of a word, that is to say, when it is both preceded 
 and followed by one or more consonants, the circle is gen- 
 erally used. ((?) When the circle occurs between two 
 straight strokes of the same direction, the circle is written 
 with involute motion. See group 8. {b) ^Vhen written be- 
 tween two straight strokes of different direction, the circle 
 is written in the shortest way, that is, on the outside of the 
 angle. See group 9. (r) AVhen written between a straight 
 stroke and a curved stroke, it is written inside the curve. See 
 group 10. (</) Hetween two curves, the circle is usually
 
 The Qrcle-s-s. 
 
 75 
 
 placed inside the first (see group ii); but rarely, for greater 
 convenience, it is written inside the second (see group 12). 
 105. Rules for Reading Outlines Containing S and 
 Z. — lyCi') When an outline begins with a circle, the word be- 
 gins with s. (/') When an outline ends with a circle, the 
 word ends with s or z. 
 
 Exercise L. 
 
 To be read and ciipied. 
 
 ^'^ -7Y^-^--- P- 
 
 L...'::::", t '^--l ^ -^ .^ i ^. 
 
 ^^i 
 
 ^^ ^ ^ \ 
 
 ■A 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 ...jl. \S ^.:L 
 
 . ) s- ^ ^ S"^ ^^ 
 
 _--) n 
 
 6K ^ 1 '.i 4^ 
 
 ,r L, L__>5: .^. 
 
 8i ^ _^^ \ 
 
 10 
 
 ^ ^ ^ k ^ ^ >"> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^N^-v-\
 
 76 The PhonograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 Exercise LI. 
 
 To be written in phonograpliy. 
 
 1. Dose, goose, tease, gaze, oats, hooks, adz, eggs, decks, hops, op- 
 pose, chops, peruse, face, maze, these, lose, muffs, purse, oatlis, hours, 
 lameness. 
 
 2. Bias, Jewess, Louis, Ellas. 
 
 3. Sad, sage, sack, Surrey, sty, said, superb, survive, save, seize, seal, 
 same, .soothe, ceremony, slice. 
 
 4. Scion, sewage, suet, Suez, Sierra. 
 
 5. Busy, Jessie, .saucy, sj)icy, Lucy, jealousy, dizzy, juicy, lessee, 
 Nas.sau, posy, policy, fallacy, intimacy, tipsy. 
 
 6. Assume, assignee, aside, asleep, esquire. 
 
 7. Zeal, zany, Zion, zero, zealous. 
 
 8. Dusty, Busby, research, cassock, outside, bespeak. 
 
 9. Episode, desk, rusty, hasty, expel, desperado, custom, caustic, 
 ecstasy, justice, modesty. 
 
 10. Dozen, nuisty, l)asin, absolve, buxom, dismay, garrison, maxim, 
 medicine, specify, alongside. 
 
 11. Evasive, pencil, cancel, embezzle, falsely, imljecile, jealously, un- 
 sate, assessor, ma.son. 
 
 12. I'^acility.
 
 Lesson XXII. — The Circles-s and -z.— 
 Sentence-writing. 
 
 io6. Initial and Final Vowels. — The rules for writing 
 the circle and stroke forms of .*' and .': (see par. 103) are of 
 especial importance because of their bearing on the matter 
 of writing initial and final vowels in sentence-writing. The 
 correct application of these rules enables us to disjjense with 
 the writing of many such vowels. When an outline begins 
 wilh a stroke-^- we infer that the word begins with a vowel, 
 and, similarly, when an outline ends with a stroke-j- or -z we 
 infer that the word ends with a vowel. It is, therefore, un- 
 necessary, in such cases, actually to write the vowel. ^Ve 
 know it is there from the form of the outline. 
 
 107. Logograms. — Learn the following logograms de- 
 rived from forms containing circle-i- and z: 
 
 is, his, o as, has, ^ its, .six, because, .f. satisfy-ied, 
 
 (3 this, C yours, v._p hence, impossible, ..... influence, 
 
 (5"^ somebody, v. .several, similar, J- those, --.- office. 
 
 108. Plurals of Logograms. — The circle-.? may be at- 
 tached to any logogram to indicate the plural of a noun, or 
 
 the third person singular of a verb, thus : X... hoi^es, times, 
 
 I, does, / advantages, kingdoms, .V .. halves, (, thinks, 
 
 -/-- thanks, thousands, -\. uses (;/), .\ uses (?'), . . things, 
 
 r 
 
 ^__p knows, owns, ^ improvements, _ years. 
 
 Note : is used as a logogram for both dollar and dollars. 
 
 77
 
 78 The PJioiiograpJiic Amanitensis. 
 
 109. Contractions. — Learn the following contractions: 
 J-- December, / Massachusetts, f;^/ satisfactory, 
 
 L disadvantage, V^ nevertheless, \ subject, 
 
 I exchange-d, \^'\_^_^ Pennsylvania, \ subjected, 
 
 — ._a_ manuscript, \. purpose, L whatsoever, 
 
 mistake, X\ respect-ful-ly, i whosoever. 
 
 110. Phrase-writing. — Contrary to the general rule of 
 phrase-writing, the circles is, his, o as, lias, do not take 
 their own position when they begin a phrase, but accommo- 
 date themselves to the position of the following word. In 
 this respect they are like the UaV-a-an-aiid and the logogram 
 he. (Compare paragraphs 74 and 82.) The circle maybe 
 attached to the end of certain words in phrase-writing to 
 represent the word us. Practise the following phrases, and 
 note the contracted forms of well and truly used in writ- 
 ing the phrases as-rvell-as a-wd yours-triily. 
 
 Exercise LII. 
 
 -V } 4^ ^-^^ ^ 

 
 TJic Circles-s and -z. 79 
 
 It-has, it-has-never, it-is-impossible, as-far, as-far-as, as-well-as, as- 
 long-as, as-mucli-as, his-own, his-ovvn-name, his-own-time, of-these, of-this, 
 of-tliose, on-these, on-this, on-those, in-these, in-this, in-those, with-these, 
 with-this, with-those, and-these, and-this, and-those, as-these, as-this, 
 as-those, those-who, those-who-are, those-who-make, those-who-receive, 
 yours-truly, yours-respectfully, make-us, take-us, took-us, have-us, think-us, 
 see-us, reach-US, push -us, bear-us, teach-us, cheer-us, fear-us, hke-us, 
 name-us, wake-us, hang-us, of-us, to-us, on-us, before-us, with-us, be- 
 yond us. 
 
 111. Limits of Position-writing-. — As stated in para- 
 graph 35, it is, in general, not necessary to write words of 
 more than two strokes in position. If, similarly, a primitive 
 word is written with two strokes plus a circle, the outline may 
 be written in the second position, the most convenient 
 place, without respect to the accented vowel ; as \ o box, 
 
 \/ palace, X^ 7-eason, etc. Derivative words, ho\\'ever, 
 should be written in accordance with the position of their 
 
 respective primitives, as peak , peaks , arch ..^.., 
 
 arches ^.^ >. 
 
 112. Special Forms. — The word business, is writ- 
 ten in the first position to distinguish it from ^ii,.^ baseness 
 in the second. The word si/it is always written with its 
 vowel joined, thus ...P., in order to distinguish it from ...P. 
 
 satisfy. The word V thus should always be vocalized, even 
 in sentence-writing, to distinguish it from (3 this. In writing 
 the frequently-recurring words a/ivays I s , answer ^_p^ > 
 
 instead 1, the initial vowels may be omitted. The follow- 
 ing common phrases are written with the special forms in- 
 
 dicated: bill-of-hxding ..^ , New-Jersey I , New-York [, , 
 
 New- York- City .J.... .
 
 So TJie PhonograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 113. Suffixes. — Words ending with the dot-///^'- may have 
 their phirals indicated by the use of the disjoined circle-^' 
 
 written in the position of the dot, thus: doi'ii:^s\ , sav//i^^s J , 
 etc. Similarly phrases ending with -ing-his and -ing-iis may be 
 written with the disjoined circle. Thus : j/iaki/ig-his .-^__o, 
 
 . . — — o 
 
 giving-us 
 
 114. Business Letters. — One of the most important of 
 the uses of phonography is the writing from dictation of busi- 
 ness letters for subsequent transcription on the typewriter. 
 As it is the special purpose of this book to fit the student for 
 the work of the business amanuensis, the remaining exercises 
 will consist, in large part, of model business letters, written 
 in phonography, accomjjanied by model transcripts in fac- 
 simile tyi)ewriting. The shorthand notes are written with 
 pen or pencil (preferably the former) in oblong note-books. 
 Each day's work should be dated, and the letters taken in a 
 single day should be numbered consecutively as .shown below. 
 In taking a letter from dictation it is unnecessary to write in 
 phonography the word Mr. or Messrs. at the beginning. 
 The i)roi)er word should be written out, of course, in making 
 the typewritten manuscrijit. 
 
 Exercise LIII.
 
 TJie Circlcs-s and -z. 
 
 -t ^^^ ^ _ • 
 
 -^ i~^-a--_j/-- 
 
 ,..iC,. 
 
 >Q_P 
 
 F - 
 
 ■ ^ X^ J-5 .^^vC^^ 
 
 ...N^ -Or. >^ ^. 
 
 y ' ^ 
 
 <i_a_-i 
 
 .a.. 
 
 i -^ - r 
 
 Vj5 , 
 
 1 rf r. 
 
 }, 
 
 V 
 
 r 
 
 —% 
 
 t 
 
 c... 
 
 Si 
 
 ...nx^.L: a ^ 1 
 
 - ^ J- /^ \. - 
 
 -7 1_'TC 
 
 ..A .y> 
 
 ^ LZ..
 
 82 
 
 The Pkoiiograpliic AuianiLcnsis. 
 
 I. 
 
 Hr . James Smith, 
 Lowell, Uass. 
 
 Sir: 
 
 We have before us yours of November 25. In answer, we would say 
 you may ship your buggy to us right away for repairs. As far as we see 
 now, we shall have the new Sadler axles in this week. If, however, they 
 should fail to come in, we shall use instead an axle of similar make, 
 with ball-bearings, which we think will suit you as well as those you 
 specify, and which will be exchanged for the Sadler axle at any time you 
 may write desiring us to make the exchange. 
 
 How do you wish us to make up the seaf We think you said to some- 
 body at our New York City office, at the time you were here, six weeks 
 ago, you would like to have a lazyback. If such is the case, we beg you 
 to write us and say what you desire, as we wish to make no mistake in 
 this respect. 
 
 It will be our aim, as always, to give you a wholly satisfactory 
 job and with no delay whatsoever, as we recognize your purpose in giving 
 the business to us is to save time. You may look for the bill of lading 
 to reach you on December 15, or earlier. 
 
 Hoping we shall succeed in satisfying you in all ways, we beg leave 
 to be 
 
 Yours respectfully. 
 
 2. 
 
 Messrs. Sims & Sikes, 
 
 Cincinnati , Ohio . 
 Sirs: 
 
 I am sorry to say things are in such shape here as to make it im- 
 possible for me to think of leaving for several weeks. Hence I shall 
 have to ask you to allow somebody else to represent you at Newcastle, 
 Pennsylvania, in case the subject of installing pumping machinery in ths 
 factory of Smith & Sons should come up at an early day. If Sampson has
 
 The Circles-s and -z. 
 
 nothing to do now in New York it will be safe to give it to him, because 
 of his having had charge of the job in New Jersey, which in some re- 
 spects was similar to this; for example, in its being set on a hillside. 
 If he (or whosoever else may have charge of this case) will go to my 
 desk and look up a manuscript and some sketches I took of the New Jersey 
 job, he will see how similar are the various details in both. I think 
 this will help him in making his designs. 
 
 I am subjected to a disadvantage here because it is impossible to 
 make satisfactory time in the laying of pipe. The city officers have 
 given me much annoyance ever since I came here and they seem to be sat- 
 isfied with nothing we do. I hope, nevertheless, by respectful reason- 
 ing soon to influence them to take a sensible view of the case, and thus 
 to see how serious a mistake they are making. 
 Yours truly,
 
 Lesson XXIII. — The Circles-ses, -sez, 
 -zes, -z^z, 
 
 115. The Large Circle. — ^^'hen a noun is written with 
 an outline ending with a circle-x or -z, its plural is formed by 
 enlarging the circle. See group i below. In the same way, 
 the third person singular of a verb is formed by enlarging the 
 small circle, when the latter ends the infinitive. See group 
 2. The syllables scs, sez, zes, zez may also be represented 
 in other cases by the large circle. See group 3. 
 
 116. Sez-z. — Whenever the singular of a noun ends with 
 a large circle, the plural is formed by adding a small circle-s, 
 H-riting it around the stroke ; and the verb is similarly treated. 
 See group 4. 
 
 117. Special Vocalization of Large Circles, — The 
 normal vowel in the syllable, represented by the large circle, 
 is e (the second- place light dot); but the large circle may be 
 specially vocalized, as follows : A light dot placed within a 
 circle indicates 'i (the first-place light dot); and the circle 
 reads, sis, siz, zis or ziz ; a heavy dot within the circle repre- 
 sents e (the first-place heavy dot); a light dash within the 
 circle represents u (the second-place light dash); a heavy 
 dash within the circle represents aw (the first-place heavy 
 dash); the diphthong ^ represents 7. See group 5. 
 
 Exercise LIV. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 . ^ ^ / / V. y-^cc JX^^^^^ 
 
 84
 
 rJic Circlcs-ses, -sez, -zes, -zez. 85 
 
 .ja..:^.--<^....^ "^...^ U Ip ^ 
 
 _D 
 
 I 
 
 A A 
 
 2 ^ E L. Ld _Z _J^ ^_z2v...^_/^^rt^^^ ^ ^.. 
 
 ^^^^y^^^':sr , , ^ 
 
 "ZD 
 
 »s> 
 
 S -^ "V o_LD 
 
 4^^ v"^-^^- 
 
 ^A J 
 
 ZS' 
 
 i: _x2.^,..±...-i\^. 
 
 i^_ 
 
 118. Directions for Writing-. — Care should be taken 
 to make the large circle sufficiently large to distinguish it 
 clearly from the small circle. No harm can result from mak- 
 ing a large circle larger, or from making a small circle 
 smaller, than the standard ; but deviations from the standard 
 in the opposite direction would, obviously, lead to a clash. 
 
 Exercise LV. 
 To be written in plionograpliy. 
 
 1. Base, bases, case, cases, vice, vices, kiss, kisses, ounce, ounces, 
 force, forces, box, boxes, ellipse, ellipses, gas, gases, hostess, hostesses, 
 lace, laces, lease, leases, mass, masses, niece, nieces, race, races, source, 
 sources, voice, voices, pause, pauses, adz, adzes, fuse, fuses, rose, roses, 
 cheese, cheeses. 
 
 2. Abase, abases, annex, annexes, chase, chases, embarrass, cnibar- 
 'rasses, enforce, enforces, mix, nnxes, pierce, pierces, repose, reposes, rise,
 
 86 The PJionograpJiic Aniamicims. 
 
 rises, pause, pauses, peruse, peruses, refuse, refuses, oppose, opposes, 
 amaze, amazes, choose, chooses, harmonize, harmonizes, revise, revises. 
 
 3. Access, abscess, possess, repossess, necessity, excessive, successfully. 
 
 4. Excesses, recesses, successes, dispossesses. 
 
 5. Axis, amanuensis, desist, subsist, system, bases, theses, season, 
 census, suspicious, exhausting, excise, exercise, incisive, emphasizing.
 
 Lesson XXIV. — Large Circles. — Sen- 
 tence-writing. 
 
 119. Plurals of Logograms. — When a logogram ends 
 with a circle-j-, the small circle may be enlarged to in- 
 
 — p vX) . ^ 
 
 dicate the plural, as influence, influences, office, 
 
 _ offices, 
 
 120. Phrase-writing. — When a word which begins with 
 
 o 
 
 a circle-i" is preceded by a logogram is, his, o (is, has, the 
 two circles may combine and become one large circle. See 
 group I below. When a word ends with a circle and is fol- 
 lowed by his or i/s, the circles may be combined in like man- 
 ner. See group 2. 
 
 121. Disjoined Affixes. — The circle-i- may be disjoined 
 and placed beside a stroke to represent the affix self. See 
 group 3. The circle placed at the beginning of the stroke in 
 the position of the dot -con {-co?n), reads self-con {-com). See 
 group 4. The large circle may be placed at the side of a 
 stroke to represent the suffix -sehes. See group 5. The dot 
 which ordinarily stands lor con- and com- may also be used to 
 represent cog-. See group 6. 
 
 Exercise LVI. 
 0_ 
 
 
 ..^^^ t -^ 
 
 2__^i aV_U,,_\o,„_^ 
 
 87
 
 88 The Phonographic ^-luiaiiuciLsis. 
 
 3 T^^ t^.^^V'^^:^.^..:'/ 
 
 4 -^ ^ ^ L_.l - ....- ^- 
 
 5 r^Q &. (°.. ^ 
 
 6.:r^ :r^ ^:r^ /<^ ./^ z--^^ 
 
 1. Is-said, is-safe, is-seen, is-such, is-satisfactory, is-subjoct, hissorrow, 
 his-speech, his-sympathy, his-soul, as-soon, as-soon-as, as-safe, as-safe-as, 
 as-small, as-small-as, as-satisfactory, has-said, has-seen, has-several, has-some. 
 
 2. Knows-his (us), sees-his (us), shows-his (us), takes his (us), pays- 
 his (us), leaves-his (us), keeps-his (us), cause-bis (us), force-his (us), 
 makes his (us). 
 
 3. Myself, himself, herself, yourself, sellish, self-respect, self-possessed, 
 self-denial, self-denying, self-important, self improvement, self-knowledge. 
 
 4. Self-conscious, self-consciousness, self-confiding, self-condemning, self- 
 conceit. 
 
 5. Ourselves, yourselves, themselves. 
 
 6. Cognize, cognizance, recognizance, recognize, recognizes, recognizing. 
 
 122. Special Forms. — The words Mrs. ...y... and 
 
 jWsscs ^ arc written with the forms here indicated, in order 
 that they may l)e clearly distinguished. The phrase United 
 States is briefly written with the irregular form ^jD , and the 
 
 \t\\\di^{t this season, thus: \^ . l'"inal \owels are not neces- 
 sary in ^^A>^ necessary and | necessity. 
 
 123. Business Letters.— 
 
 Exercise LVII. 
 
 ^10 *•• 
 
 AC : 7>
 
 r:x^ -12 
 
 I_L.:. 
 X 1 
 
 Large Circles. 89 
 
 / r^ Vd 
 
 ...k_.. 
 
 4- 
 
 V. 
 
 T^- 
 
 x....rrf k.. 
 
 ^ f 
 
 ^ ^ <x r 
 
 r... ^.> 
 
 f 
 
 ■■N:-^X f- 
 
 ../:'. -^ .(i, ^....^.. 
 
 ..I. .ri„=» V ,\ 5..:3._ 
 
 rf ri" r - \ :.5 ^ 
 
 2),, 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 f^ ^ --f " /^ ^■ 
 
 - ^ --^ -1 N- 
 
 t^ t ^" ^^^-•v^^^^^^^ 
 
 1^ \ .^ ) kr I ^ CZS.. 
 
 L 
 
 ..\_, 
 
 J... 
 
 4
 
 90 The Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 Messrs. Moses & Company, 
 
 Mi Iwaukee . 
 Sirs: 
 
 I beg leave to acknowledge the receipt of yours of May 7. I will 
 make you a rate of $15 a copy for the large map of the United States, or 
 $12.50 each for six copies. If you wish to see the map before you buy 
 it, I will ship a copy to each of your offices, and if it fails to come 
 up to your idea of what you are looking for, you may ship it back any 
 time this month, and you will have nothing to pay. You may thus see for 
 yourself what the map is before you decide to pay out anything for it. 
 
 Have you any necessity for large road maps? I have some copies of 
 such maps of Iowa, Ohio, New York and New Jersey on which I shall be 
 happy to make you a low rate. 
 
 Hoping to have as much of your business this season as you have 
 
 usually given me, I am 
 
 Yours truly. 
 
 Mr, Ramuel Johnson, 
 
 Buffalo, N. Y. 
 Sir: 
 
 We have yours of February 5, in which you ask us to give you some 
 insight into the lease given by Mrs. Elizabeth Pierce to the Misses 
 Robinson, of this city. We have ourselves already looked into this af- 
 fair, which, by the way, is rather peculiar in some respects, and know 
 it to be as represented to you by Mrs. Pierce. We have no knowledge as 
 to the influences bearing on the Misses Robinson at the time they took 
 the lease, but we do know they have paid each month and have receipts 
 to show for it. This is all we think it necessary to say on this sub- 
 ject at this time. 
 
 Yours respectfully,
 
 Lesson XXV. — The Loops-st, -str. 
 
 124. Loop-st in Past Tenses. — 'rhe consonants st. 
 without an intervening vowel, are of frequent occurrence, 
 especially in forming the past tenses of those verbs the 
 present tense of which ends with s. In writing such past 
 tenses, lengthen the circle into a loop, extending back one- 
 half the length of the stroke. See group i. 
 
 125. St in Other Cases. — The loop may also be used 
 to represent st in other cases, both at the end of words (see 
 group 2) and at the beginning of words (see group 3). 
 
 126. Medial St. — The loop-j-/ may be used in the middle 
 of outlines whenever convenient forms result from such use 
 (see group 4), but it can never be used when a stroke follows 
 it in such a direction as to strike through the stroke to which 
 the loop is attached, as in vestige, custody, etc. 
 
 127. Representation of Zd. — The loop may be used to 
 represent zd after the strokes /^v^. ^ , but it must be 
 shaded to distinguish it from st. See group 5. After any 
 other single stroke zd must be written with the form f (see 
 group 6); but, after outlines of two or more strokes, the loop 
 may be used without shading (see group 7). 
 
 128. Sts. — When the loop-j-/ is followed by s, the circle is 
 written'around the stroke. See group 8. 
 
 129. Loop-Str. — ^^'hen a word ends with the consonants 
 str without intervening vowels, these consonants may be 
 represented by a large final looi). This loop extends two- 
 
 91
 
 92 
 
 TJie PJionographic Amanuensis. 
 
 thirds the length of the stroke to which it is attached. See 
 group 9. 
 
 130. Strs. — When the loop-^/r is followed by s, the circle 
 is written around the stroke. See group 10. 
 
 Exercise LVIII. 
 'l"o be read and copied. 
 
 X ^^^-u C^^._.^.-^..^....: 
 
 ..:^..N. _^._z.£..£,.k u:^^-- 
 
 h 
 
 v^ 
 
 L.'.."^.,.^x...^ \ a. h x 3u. 
 
 5 -^ ^. ..^ ■■■ 
 
 71:^ ^ f^ ■^' <k— - ^ 
 
 8 X iilk^ 'I'^.t C... X..^;^>^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 9 N^. b- /■ .^ 
 
 ^ U 
 
 .^ 
 
 ^ :^-^ 
 
 <?<::? 
 
 -z^&'^<P C^ 
 
 t-^ V?>^.
 
 TJic Loops-st, -sir. 
 
 Exercise LIX. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Toss, tossed ; assess, assessed ; erase, erased ; face, faced ; mix, 
 mixed ; solace, solaced ; abase, abased ; box, boxed ; collapse, collapsed ; 
 space, spaced ; elapse, elapsed ; enforce, enforced ; induce, induced ; 
 license, licensed ; notice, noticed ; rejoice, rejoiced ; witness, witnessed. 
 
 2. Beast, chest, vest, zest, arrest, moist, roast, cast, last, sweetest, sick- 
 est, silliest, soonest, utmost, Methodist, Belfast, burst, detest. 
 
 3. Stab, study, stage, stiff, steel, steam, sting, stood, stool, star, stam- 
 mer, sterile, stumble, sticks, stars, states, studious, stoutest, stillest. 
 
 4. Mystify, destiny, mustache. 
 
 5. Roused, housed, noised. 
 
 6. Paused, gazed, amazed, amused, buzzed, fused, appeased. 
 
 7. Reposed, refused, perused, chastised, disguised. 
 
 8. Beasts, chests, vests, coasts, dusts, fists, pests, bursts. 
 
 9. Poster, duster, jester, feaster, Lester, boaster, coaster, fester, huck- 
 ster, sinister, ancestor, barrister, chorister, teamster. 
 
 10. Festers, boasters, jesters, posters, ancestors, choristers.
 
 Lesson XXVI. — The Loops. — Sentence- 
 writing. 
 
 131. Logograms. — Learn the following logograms, de- 
 rived from the loops : 
 
 <^ first, ^^ next, influenced, / suggest, August. 
 
 132. Superlatives of Grammalogues. — The \oo\)-st 
 may be added to any logogram for an adjective or adverb, to 
 
 indicate the superlative degree. Thus : J. largest, com- 
 monest, ,^^^ youngest, longest. 
 
 133. Phrase-writing. — Certain words {must, last, next, 
 etc.), ending with the loop-.s7, may be contracted in phrase- 
 writing by reducing the loop to a circle. 
 
 Exercise LX. 
 
 -t^ r 
 
 .^,0^. 
 
 ^ -i -i7\ X: ^ 
 
 n^ n f'''\zi -f^^"^ /^- -^ 
 
 Must-be, must-be-ready, must-be-right, must-be- wrong, must-liave, must- 
 have-them, must-make, must-make-them, must-ahvays, must-al ways-be, 
 must-never, must-never-be, must-receive, next-day, next time, next-year, 
 next-season, next-Sunday, next-Tuesday, next-Saturday, next-January, 
 next-July, next-November, next-December, last-month, last-time, last-day, 
 last-week, last-Monday, last-Tuesday, last-March. 
 
 94
 
 -\o postage, 
 
 95 
 
 earnest, 
 
 p The Loops. — Se7itence-ivriting. 
 
 134. Special Forms. 
 
 V post-office, L_ in-stock, ..L at-first. 
 
 135. Business Letters.— Paragraphing.— In taking 
 letters from dictation it is not always i)Ossible to indicate the 
 division into paragraphs, and this matter must be carefully 
 considered at the time the letter is transcribed on the type- 
 writer. Whenever, however, in note-taking it is obvious that 
 a paragra])h is proper, it may be indicated by leaving a gap 
 of an inch or more after the last sentence of the preceding 
 
 paragraph. 
 
 Exercise LXI. 
 
 \p,„:, ,LiCz....._::^z«...£....\Q.x...!=r.^^^^^^ l^^ 
 
 K^^^^/t ^ -^-^« "^"-^P 
 
 i^^.M^L^£. k_j.l.,.,_=...r,^^r:l....v, 
 
 \^lk...:r\^.5 ^...u......~ :^...L.>^..-'^:° ^^ 
 
 / : 
 
 o*^ ^- 
 
 ..^\^.L^^s>yCll ,V
 
 96 The Phonograpkic Amanuensis. ^ 
 
 - 1 
 
 ^ ^ f 
 
 ^-\ K 
 
 .1 .v.... 
 
 tz^ih 
 
 \ 
 
 rv 
 
 ^.:^...z; ^..^..... 1^....^! x: 
 
 - ^ y — -^ ^ ^• 
 
 ,..-^... 
 
 ^■^ ^ ■^- ^-^./■^■■ 
 
 L - r ^,.^._. •,/...,^.... 
 
 ...^dx ^^...:^^ ^..^...^... 
 
 W. 
 
 ^-^ -.. J ( ., ^2^. 
 
 ^- V f-^- 
 
 ■T "■■■ 
 
 ...^... 
 
 -X: d-;n^<e^ ^ ^-^ 
 
 ^...d..r:.3o._...2:„„) =^.v:„'....rzf.4 > >.a r: 15.. 
 
 ■^ t^ \. f:' - r ^■■-^--■■H^- ^ 
 
 r^^rTX-^N^. y,.r^,. ^z:,^,v^ ^. j.. 
 
 _v\_r_,..r, L.,zn.3 'siix.^ -^ ^ 
 
 t:
 
 The Loops. — Sentence-writing. 97 
 
 5. 
 
 Stanley F. Steele, Esq., 
 
 Chicago, 111 . 
 Sir: 
 
 We have yours of August 1, and we give you our earnest thanks for 
 all you say respecting our machinery. 
 
 We shall, on the first of next January, set up offices of our own 
 in both New York City and Chicago, but for the rest of this year we de- 
 sire to avail ourselves of the services of somebody to represent us in 
 such business as may arise in your city. As you will readily see, he 
 must be possessed of a thorough knowledge of our machinery such as you 
 yourself possess, for it would scarcely pay him to study up the details 
 of our business just to take charge for the next few months. 
 
 Do you think it would in any way justify you in taking charge of 
 our affairs yourself, if we were to say you may name your own salary 
 for the period of time we have in view? If it is impossible for you to 
 give any of your time to our business, will you suggest the name of 
 somebody who seems to you to be possessed of the necessary knowledge? 
 We would be influenced altogether by your view, and shall be satisfied 
 with any choice you may make. 
 
 Hoping you may decide to take the temporary agency yourself, I am 
 Yours truly. 
 
 T. F. Sterling, Esq . , 
 
 Cincinnati , Ohio . 
 Sir: 
 
 An item in the Post causes us to think you may be ready at this 
 time to buy some rugs for your new house in Avondale, and we respectful- 
 ly beg leave to ask you to come into our store, the next time you are in 
 the city, to see our stock. 
 
 We have in stock a vast mass of Asiatic rugs, such as will give you 
 an immense range of choice, taking in the commonest as well as the rar- 
 est makes, the largest as well as the smallest sizes, and the cheapest 
 as well as the most expensive varieties. Among our hall and stair rugs 
 are some of the longest ever seen in this city. 
 
 We feel satiefied we have the rugs to suit you if you will allow ua 
 to show them to you. 
 
 Yours respectfully,
 
 98 The PJionografJiic -Amamiensis, 
 
 7.- 
 
 Meesrs. Storer & Pool, 
 
 Newark, N. J. 
 Sire: 
 
 We beg leave to acknowledge receipt of yours of May 30, in which 
 you say our bill of March 4 was paid by your check of May 15. Your 
 check would seem to be delayed in the mails, and we think this must be 
 the reason for our receiving to-day a notice, issued by the post-office 
 of your city, saying a piece of mail bearing our name lies in the Newark 
 post-office with postage unpaid. We mail stamps for it to-day. 
 
 Shall you be buying any new stock this month? If so, we would sug- 
 gest to you to take enough of our "Kearsarge" caps for boys. This style 
 was first given out last year, and at first it looked as if it would be 
 a failure, but this season it has become the most popular of our caps 
 for the youngest boys. 
 
 Yours truly, •
 
 *- ' ^u 
 
 B 0. BAffH UW 
 
 Lesson XXVII.— The N-hook. 
 
 136. The N-hook. — The consonant // may be repre- 
 sented by a small hook attached at the end of any stroke. 
 After straight strokes the hook is written with evolute motion 
 (see group i), but after curved strokes it is written on the 
 concave side of the stroke (see grou]) 2.) 
 
 137. Rules for the Stroke and Hook Forms of N. — 
 (<z) When // is the last sound in a word, use the hook (see 
 groups I and 2); except (/') when the // is preceded by two 
 consecutive vowels one of which is accented, in which case the 
 stroke form should be used. See group 3. (r) ^^'hen a word 
 ends with a \owel preceded by //, use the stroke. See group 4. 
 
 . 138. Medial N. — While the //-hook is most generally 
 used at the end of words, it may also be employed in the 
 middle of outlines when convenient forms result from such 
 use. See group 5. 
 
 139. Combined N-hook and Circles. — The circle-j 
 may be written within the ;/-hook and the combination thus 
 formed is read //s or /;s. See group 6. When j- or g e//ds a 
 word after the ;/-hook attached to a straight stroke, the com- 
 bination may be contracted to a small circle written with ev- 
 olute motion. See group 7. Similarly, the large circle may 
 be written with evolute motion after straight strokes to repre- 
 sent fises. See group 8. These forms will not be mistaken 
 for the simple j- and ses as the latter are always written with 
 involute motion after straight strokes. See paragraphs 100 
 and 115. After curves the large circle cannot, of course, be 
 written within the hook, but must be atti^ched to the stroke-^. 
 See group 9. 
 
 99
 
 lOO The FJwnographic Amanuensis. 
 
 140. Combined N-hook and Loops. — In like manner, 
 the loops-jY and -sir may be written on the evohite side of 
 straight strokes to indicate //x/ and nstr. See group 10. The 
 simple st and str are invariably Avritten with involute motion 
 after straiirht strokes. 
 
 Exercise LXII. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 ^ J, I. LI ^: X - { X..^ :;f ^ ^ i. 
 
 N^.-^ I ^- ^ ^ '^....:N^,..\^X...X 
 
 2 ^---^ 
 
 3^- 
 
 4 
 
 c > 
 
 ^ ^sC:^...../^^ ^.. 
 
 ...i:^ '^^ C... 
 
 , ^"^ ; \:3 ^ fj-^r^ 
 
 k \ i 
 
 6._v^ i <)- p. ^ ^A ^ ^.. 61: k^ X 
 
 7 ^ U- ^ >^-^ :f-^ V J" J 
 
 ' ^ t-^- d^ ^ }. ^ 
 
 -ip- ^..- &..- --^ 
 
 9 
 
 IO...i> 
 
 .iiA.
 
 The A'-Jiook. 
 
 Exercise LXIII. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Bone, down, join, gown, attain, chin, dawn, open, rain, .satin, 
 sicken, .skein, Spain, festoon, sexton, spin, deepen, urban, urcliin, bacon, 
 pagan, barren, region, cabin, beckon. 
 
 2. Vine, thine, zone, lean, horn, human, yawn, hempen, main, hu- 
 mane, sullen, discern, muslin, stolen, summon, demon, dampen, famine, 
 muffin, bullion, champion, haven. 
 
 3. Ruin, Joan, lion. 
 
 4. Puny, funny, \'ienna, hominy, mania, Dinah, ninny, Juno, Helena, 
 Illinois, arena, assignee, bony. 
 
 5. Banish, Canary, runner, pinch, bunch, vanish, barrenly, milliner. 
 
 6. Veins, assigns, shuns, earns, ovens, lanes, nouns, vigilance, Athens, 
 kinsman, ransom, lancer, thenceforth, Spencer. 
 
 7. Bones, dance, joins, guns, spins, spoons, sickens, pains, whitens, 
 widens, response, expense, mourns, enhance, wakens, diligence, instance, 
 elegance. 
 
 8. Bounces, chances, rinses, dispenses, expenses, ensconces, expanses. 
 
 9. Evinces, lances, announces, offen.ses, lenses. 
 
 10. Bounced, chanced, rinsed, instanced, distanced, enhanced, punster, 
 spinster.
 
 Lesson XXVIII.— The N-hook— Sen- 
 tence-writing. 
 
 141. Final Vowels. — The rules for the use of the stroke 
 and hook forms of // (see paragraph 137) enable us to dis- 
 pense with the writing of many final vowels in sentence-writ- 
 ing. Whenever the outline ends with a stroke-//, we infer 
 that the word ends with a vowel, which need not, therefore, 
 actually l)e written. 
 
 142. Limits of Position-writing-. — If a primitive 
 word be written with two strokes, plus a hook, the outline 
 may be written in the second position without respect to its 
 accented vowel, as X remnvn, Vj violin. Compare 
 Daragraphs 35 and in. Derivative words, however, should 
 be written in the position of their respective primitives ; thus 
 
 ^..Jine, \^Jincr. 
 
 143. Logograms. — Learn the following logograms : 
 
 \upon, \ been, J ten, J general-ly, — 3 can, ^ again, 
 
 often, Vo. phonography, even, within, \^ than, 
 
 f alone, / ^ man, men, opinion, ___, against. 
 
 144. Compounds. — Whenever the logogram men 
 
 enters into a compound, it must be vocalized to distinguish it 
 from man ; thus, ^^^^ salesman, C^^ salesmen. 
 
 145. Contractions. — Learn the following contractions : 
 
 \j^ phonographer, Vo — ])honographic, mistaken. 
 
 102
 
 riie N- J look . — Se)L tence-ioriting. 
 
 146. Disjoined Affixes.— (</) -Ly. Whenever final / 
 does not join conveniently (which is frequently the case after 
 the //-hook) the sufifix -ly may be expressed by means of a dis- 
 joined stroke-/. See group i below. (In rapid writing it is 
 sometimes convenient to strike this disjoined / down.) The 
 disjoined -ly is often used also after adjective logograms and 
 contractions in' order to secure more characteristic and legible 
 forms. See group 2. 
 
 (//) -Ility, -ality, -arity, are expressed by disjoining the 
 stroke which represents the consonant immediately preceding 
 the suffix, and writing it near and a little below the first part 
 of the outline. See group 3. 
 
 (<:) -Ship. — The suffix -ship is expressed by the disjoined 
 stroke ^. See group 4. 
 
 (</) Circiim-. — The prefix circum- is expressed by a dis- 
 joined small circle placed beside the first stroke of the stem- 
 outline. See group 5. 
 
 (,;') Magna-, 7/iagni-, is expressed by a disjoined stroke — ^ 
 placed over the following consonant. See group 6. 
 
 Exercise LXIV.
 
 .'04 TJie Phonographic Ainanucnsis. 
 
 5 i i i J :"^ --.^ ^..^ - 
 
 6. .X. .AL.^ X.j_p„ 
 
 1. Finely, heavenly, honestly, justly, vainly, suddenly, slovenly, openly, 
 thinly, humanely, humanly. 
 
 2. Regularly, irregularly, peculiarly, electrically, c(jmmonly, manly, 
 evenly. 
 
 3. Suitability, responsibility, popularity, speciality, fatality, barbarity,, 
 sensibility, possibility, disability, geniality, formality, irregularity, regular- 
 ity, peculiarity, similarity, familiarity, nobility, hostility. 
 
 4. Statesmanship, generalshij), censorship, fellowship, horsemanship, 
 kinshi]). 
 
 5. Circumstance, circumstances, circumstanced, circumstantial, circum- 
 navigate. 
 
 6. Magnify, magnifying, niagnilicence, magnanimity, magnanimous, 
 magnanimously. 
 
 147. Special Forms. — ^^ Washington, V^^ have-been, 
 .1... had-been, .1. at-once. 
 
 148. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise LXV. 
 
 ^ z ^,-. :\^._ '2^- /a,x .':i.=- ^-^ 
 
 V. ^ \. ^ !,_ Cn J LS: S^ N^, 
 
 !C^ r L. '^v.-^ A .^ n^ I ,^ 2 X 
 
 Zf. I r-: ^ %- x_ -: ■ v^'^r
 
 The N-hook. — Sentence-writing. 105 
 
 =f ^i " 
 
 _-d 
 
 i^> 
 
 > I 
 
 I ^ * 
 
 i^ l: _ 
 
 .L : ..:: 
 
 V 
 
 \=^ 
 
 \^ 
 
 ^ : C ^ L \^ z^„ 
 
 ^ ^ C^ ^ °^7 V 
 
 -—^ ^x - ^ y 
 
 -L L ^ ^^.... I z ../.. : / I. rx. 
 
 L- :i:\ k_ z. 1 _ N^v^: 
 
 ^ ^^
 
 io6 TJie Phonographic Auianucnsis. 
 
 ) J ^. 
 
 T 
 
 v^ c ' \ I : >^ 
 
 - - ' ^ ^ -^ 
 
 - u - I J -^ ^-.:i...^.. 
 
 b - ^ > ^ ^ 
 
 =-^ F -- 
 
 \_ 
 
 2'^ 
 
 U, f^, x'^^^ \ ^ \^..^^Xj> 
 
 N,.s I -21^) C r^ s^ ^^ ^ ^^^^ 
 
 ■ ..A::^ .^ 1 " i\ d^...^A .' , J..., 
 
 ■^ - ^ 5 , 
 
 . ^ r^ '^ 
 
 .^,.. 
 
 r 
 
 ..;.. 
 
 30. 
 
 / 
 
 QZxr-^' 
 
 ^..^. ...-^4^,.=^ ^S^....:2.^ 4 
 
 v^ X^-d 1 < J ^ i c. -_.,^: 
 
 > IS II^x 1-=. ) ^.. J^ ^- 
 
 N 
 
 X A, 
 
 I : 
 
 a... 
 
 ,.,r^... 
 
 a 
 
 ^\ 
 
 -^ y-- 
 
 °^^ = ^ 1 ^ E^-
 
 TJic N-Jiook. — Seiitencc-zvriting. 107 
 
 Messrs. H. J. Pain & Company, 
 
 New Orleans, La. 
 Sirs: 
 
 I have been in this city for ten days, and upon the first of the 
 month I shall leave for Boston. Each dealer in the city and suburbs has 
 been seen in turn and they seem, in general, to be highly satisfied. 
 Although I may seem to be unduly magnifying the importance of what I 
 have done here, I must nevertheless say the situation, as it now looks 
 to me, is altogether satisfactory. In my opinion we can now go ahead 
 again and run the mills all the time for the next six months at least. 
 Before I leave hero I will write you again and ask you to ship me a 
 whole set of new samples to Boston. I think this necessary, even though 
 I may take with me some I still have, for I have none remaining in some 
 of the most important lines, having been forced, as you know is often 
 the case, to give many of them away. If I should by any chance fail to 
 write before the first, you may ship them then to Young's Hotel, at 
 which house I generally stay, and they will bo in safe keeping for me. 
 I shall go back by way of Washington, and hope to be with you again 
 
 within the next two weeks. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 9- 
 
 Writewell's Business Academy, 
 
 Minneapolis, Minn. 
 Sirs : 
 
 I wish my young son to take up the study of phonography with you 
 this fall. It is necessary for him to finish with no undue loss of 
 time, but I wish him, nevertheless, to stay with you long enough to mas- 
 ter the subject thoroughly, and to be in readiness to make a fine career 
 as a phonographer . Will you inform me at your early convenience just 
 how much it will cost for him to stay with you six months, and just what 
 books will be necessary besides the "Phonographic Amanuensis," which he 
 already h£,3? Would you advise him to take up phonography alone, or to 
 combine it with bookkeeping? And, if so, I wish to know how long it 
 commonly takes to finish both studies. My opinion is against taking the 
 two studies at once, but I may be much mistaken in this, and I would 
 like to have your advice together with the reasons upon which you base 
 it. 
 
 Hoping to receive your answer at an early day, I am 
 Yours truly, 
 
 10. 
 
 Mr. Thomas Allen, 
 
 Kansas City, Mo. 
 Sir: 
 
 Notice has been given this office to be in readiness by the 15th of 
 this month to dig a ditch along the line of the road, beginning half a 
 mile west of Sharon and running west for a distance of three and one- 
 fourth miles. This ought to have been done long ago, and if we had gone
 
 io8 The PJwiiograpJiic Auianucnsis. 
 
 ahead with it last year it would have paid for itself several times in 
 the saving to the road in the wet season. 
 
 I wish you to form two gangs of thirty men each, with four f oi emen 
 --two to each gang--who can manage the men. This must be done as eoon 
 as you can, for I wish to go ahead with the job at once, if circumstan- 
 ces will in any way allow, instead of waiting to the 15th of the month. 
 So you must use all your generalship and have the men ready and in camp 
 by the first of next week. Rather than fail in this, I would be willinj, 
 to have you pay each man a bonus of a day's wages on the first week. 1 
 leave the whole responsibility of this with you, and hope you may suc- 
 ceed in arranging it all satisfactorily and on time. 
 Yours truly.
 
 Lesson XXIX.— The F-V-hook. 
 
 149. The F-V-hook. — A small final hook may be at- 
 tached to any straight stroke with involute motion, to repre- 
 sent/ (see group i) or v- (see group 2.) No difficulty is ex- 
 perienced in distinguishing/ from v in use. 
 
 150. Rules for Stroke and Hook Forms of F and 
 
 V. — ((7) When /or v is the last sound in a word, use the 
 hook. See groups i and 2. (/^) When a word ends with a 
 vowel preceded by/ or v, use the stroke. See group 3. 
 
 151. Medial F-V. — \N'hile the/r'-hook is used most fre- 
 cjuently at the end of words, it may be used medially when- 
 ever more convenient outlines result from such use. See 
 group 4. 
 
 152. Combined F-V-hook and Circle-s. — A small 
 circle may be written within the/-z'-hook and the combina- 
 tion thus formed is read -/-, or -vz. See group 5. The large 
 circle and the looi)s do not combine with the/?'-hook. 
 
 Exercise LXVI. 
 To be read and C()[iied. 
 
 I X X \ / '^....-^- 'z:....^ i:!...^.^:^. "3^ 
 
 ^ i 
 
 2 X b:..-^ ^1. ^L^.....-A.. I 
 
 109 
 
 It
 
 no TJic PJionograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 4 u^'L. iXi-^-^'^ij !i ^ '^"■ 
 
 5 X _. IZ ^... t ^ L ^ A.. ^ ^ <'........ 
 
 ^ SJ.... £f , 
 
 Exercise LXVII. 
 
 To be written in plionography. 
 
 1. Keef, tougli, chief, cuft", scoff, roof, chafe, giraffe, rough, tariff, 
 sheriff, miscliief. 
 
 2. Dive, achieve, rave, heave, hove, starve, bereave, imitative, Ijeliave, 
 deserve, subserve, positive, exhaustive. 
 
 3. Taffy, rarify, verify, deify, terrify, coffee, bevy, covey, heavy, pur- 
 view, Harvey. 
 
 4. Toughen, deafness, rouglier, toughness, cliafing, scoffer, divine, 
 divide, revery, paver. 
 
 5. Rebuffs, coughs, skiffs, reefs, giraffes, roofs, paves, caves, achieves, 
 hives, raves, arcliives, starves, dives.
 
 Lesson XXX.— The F-V-hook. -Sen- 
 tence-writing. 
 
 153. Final Vowels. — The rules for the use of the stroke 
 and hook forms of /-?' enable us to dispense with the writing 
 of many final vowels. Whenever an outline ends with a 
 stroke-/ or -?■ (see par. 150 b), we infer that the word ends 
 with a vowel, and it is not necessary to write in the vowel. 
 
 154. Logograms.— 
 
 X^above, L whatever, L differed, different-ce, 1/ whichever. 
 
 155. Contraction. — / Xi representative. 
 
 156. Phrase. — ( who-have. 
 
 157. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise LXVIII. 
 
 II 
 
 ,X^, :^ a .°:^ 
 
 ^ '\ t ^\^ ^ ^ 
 
 r 
 
 X I » f
 
 1 1 2 TJic PJionograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 .12. 
 
 
 / .^ ..^JA^,.."^. -^.-^r^.../ ^ t. 
 
 ' u ^. I _^ -^ 1 .ryr:^. .1". .\-| 
 
 ^ ■ ^ -..jQ, X,^ J Lp/. ,". 
 
 -^ '^ ^-^ ^^ -T- 
 
 ^ :x_.-. "v^ t ^ ^x.^ .^ 
 
 X ; 
 
 v 
 
 , /, ^ V ^ ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 :^..,.. 
 
 13 
 
 ^--V- 
 
 \^ 
 
 19 
 
 X ^ -_.. c? : -J. - ^A ~ vj 
 
 ^ 1 _ c ) ^,.,^ 1 - ^, ^ ^: 
 
 _x, ^ H^--^- ^ _u=£^.r:. .:^a_ 
 
 f 
 
 II. 
 
 Mr. Thomas Harvey, 
 
 Worcester, Mass. 
 Sir: 
 
 Write me before next Tuesday morning, informing me just what you 
 think your agency can do in the way of business before the last of the
 
 TJic F- 1 ^-Jiook. — Sentencc-ivriting. 1 1 3 
 
 year. Make it conservative, but take pains to give each item you are 
 carrying. I must know positively on Tuesday morning, as a representa- 
 tive of the home office gave us notice he would be here then, and I de- 
 sire to have a showing for this year which shall be above last year's. 
 Do whatever you can to help make a fine showing for the year. 
 Yours truly, 
 
 12. 
 
 Mr. J. F. Murphy, 
 
 Syracuse, N. Y. 
 Sir: 
 
 I can adjust the loss at Rochester next Monday or Tuesday. I can 
 see no way to reach it earlier, because we have had an important loss at 
 Allegheny, and, owing to Nelson's being down sick, it is necessary I 
 should go to Allegheny at once, and I shall leave this evening. I 
 think, however, it will make no difference, as a representative of the 
 Phoenix Company, who have a policy on this loss, will be at Rochester 
 to-morrow, and he can take charge of our affairs for us for a few days, 
 and we can divide the expense with the Phoenix. If you differ with me 
 on this, I would suggest you write to David and see if he can go to 
 Rochester right away. Whichever way you arrange will be satisfactory to 
 
 me . 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 13- 
 
 Messrs. Abbott & Alden, 
 
 Memphis, Tenn. 
 Sirs: 
 
 We have your bill of November 19, for roofing tar, and on referring 
 to your bill of November 14, we see you are charging us at a different 
 rate now. How is this? No notice of any change of rate has been given 
 us. The tar you ship seems to be just the same in both instances. If 
 it had differed in any way, we should be at no loss to see a reason for 
 a difference in the rate. 
 
 May we hope to hear at an early day why the difference exists in 
 the two bills? 
 
 Yours truly.
 
 Lesson XXXI. — The Shun-hook. 
 
 158. The Shun-hook. — The syllable commonly written 
 in longhand -Hon or -sion (and sometimes -siau, -tiau, -cion, 
 -cian, -shion) is represented in jjhonograijhy by a large final 
 hook. This hook is attached to strokes as follows : (^?) To 
 curves, it is written on the concave side. See group i . . 
 {/>) To straight strokes, it may be written on either side with 
 the following restrictions: (i) When the straight stroke is 
 preceded l)y an appendage (circle, hook or loop), or by a 
 curved stroke, with which it makes no angle, the shi//i-\\ook 
 is written on the side opposite such preceding curve. See 
 group 2. (2) When no such curve or appendage precedes 
 the straight stroke, the sIiu/i-\\ook is written on the side op- 
 posite the accented vowel (see group 3), except after the 
 
 strokes N //, to which it is written on the right side (see 
 group 4). (3) When the j-//////-hook is written medially, 
 that is to say, when it is followed by some other consonant, 
 it may be written on either side of the stroke. See group 5. 
 
 159. Rule for the Use of Shun-hook and Sh-N- 
 hook. — When -sio/i ends a word, use the sIii//i-h.ook (see 
 groups 1-4); except when it is jjreceded by two consecutive 
 vowels, one of which is accented, in which case the form 
 ^ should in general be used (see group 6). 
 
 160. The Backward Shun-hook. — After the circle .$• 
 and the contracted -iis (see paragraph 139), -shim is writ- 
 ten as a small hook turned through the stroke. See group 
 7. A first-place vowel, to be read between the circle and 
 
 114
 
 TJic SJiun-Jiook. 
 
 115 
 
 hook, must be written before the combination (that is, to the 
 left of upright and slanting strokes, and al)Ove horizontal 
 strokes); a second-place vowel must be written offer \t — that 
 is, to the right, or below. No third-])lace vowel occurs in 
 any word written with the backward sIiini-h.odk. 
 
 161. Shun-hook Combined with Circle-s. — The cir 
 
 cle-i' may be written within the sh///i-\\ook to indicate the 
 plural. See grou[) 8. 
 
 Exercise LXIX. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 _.,-e )>^. 

 
 ii6 TJic P}ionog7^apJiic Am aim crisis. 
 
 Exercise LXX. 
 
 To be written in plionography. 
 
 1. Fashion, lotion, motion, fusion, invasion, collision, infusion, evasion, 
 abolition, intimation, ascension, fascination. 
 
 2. Sedition, deception, hesitation, execution, section, exception, institu- 
 tion, location, fiction, vacation, benefaction. 
 
 3. Option, caution, occasion, cushion, adoption, education, irrigation, 
 adoration, apparition, separation, rejection. 
 
 4. Edition, rotation, magician, optician, reputation, expedition. 
 
 5. Auctioneer, sectional, dictionary, cautionless, occasional. 
 
 6. Expiation, evacuation, attenuation, tuition, intuition, insinuation, hu- 
 miliation. 
 
 7. Position, decision, accusation, supposition, indecision, annexation, 
 dissuasion, imposition, sensation, taxation, compensation, musicianly. 
 
 8. Fashions, sessions, resolutions, options, fictions, stations, deceptions, 
 actions, revisions, portions, occupations, distinctions, positions, impositions, 
 possessions, condensations.
 
 Lesson XXXII.— The Shun-hook.— Sen- 
 tence-writing. 
 
 162. Logograms. — information, ...i'. satisfaction. 
 
 163. Contractions. — 
 
 \ objection, \ siil)jection, X \3 representation. 
 
 164. Special Form. — iJ association. 
 
 165. Initials. — ^^'rite initials with the phonographic char- 
 acters, except in the case of the letters a, c, e, g, 0, q, 11, x, 
 in writing all of which the sma// longhand letters should be 
 used. 
 
 166. Business Letters.— Omission of "Number."— 
 In note-taking the word iiiDiiber may usually be omitted when 
 it precedes a numeral and when its use is so clear that it will 
 readily be supplied in the transcript. See letter No. 14 below. 
 
 Exercise LXXI. 
 
 :2_« : ^->.-.ii^ 1.*"' 
 
 117
 
 1 1 8 The Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 rt - I ^ !2 ^ If N 
 
 n ,i^i J- 
 
 r 
 
 e... 
 
 e ) I ^ ^ ^-^ ^^ ^ ^-^ 
 
 i Z.. \ -s^. N Ci It 
 
 _ ic 
 
 ' ^^ 
 
 ° ^-^ F - 
 
 15 
 
 '\ 
 
 ^ ^ ir/.28 
 
 c 'L^ ^ .,^,-,.„.,^,- 
 
 .-Iso t 
 
 H, \ 
 
 O/ k_ .., ,,^^j;C^>>^:y^ 
 
 :: ^^'J 
 
 ^^^'^ ■ - ^ V 
 
 ^ -■" = ^ ^ -=^ ' \ '\^ =^ ^ 
 
 V^^ ^'X./'.. V 'V^.!". .VI .^..^ I' 
 
 i ^ -^ ^ b - F - - 
 
 „ ....16..... - 
 
 I ^ "1 ^c^. ^- \ .^-^ 
 
 n, u. '. Ls , ^r <.=.A. I :x_ ^^ 
 
 r-:. ) k. z..,Zi \ J 
 
 i 
 
 
 ...^: 
 
 V 
 
 — Ro
 
 TJic ShuiL-Jiook. — Setitence-writinf^. 119 
 
 14. 
 
 Ur . J. G. Loomis, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Sir: 
 
 We acknowledge receipt of yours of July 7. We give you herewith 
 all information in the possession of this office respecting this case. 
 You will see we have already paid the Buffalo charges, and we have never 
 had any advices concerning ttie re-icing of the cars in Chicago. We ob- 
 ject to the charge of 19.46 on car No. 24739 at Omaha. The excessive 
 cost of this re-icing seems to have been caused by the car being much 
 delayed west of Chicago, but as this was due to no failure in duty on 
 our side, no charge should lie against us, but it should rather be borne 
 by the line which caused the delay. 
 
 We have no objection to make to the charge at Buffalo. 
 
 We think you will see our position is fair and just. 
 Yours truly. 
 
 15- 
 
 Mr. A. F. White, 
 
 New Haven. 
 Sir: 
 
 I shall be in your city on January 28 and would like to see you at 
 your office as early in the morning as your convenience will allow, as 
 I can be in New Haven but an hour and a half. On the representation of 
 your foreman as to the way the machine has been doing, I caused a pair 
 of new knives to be given to him a few days ago, and I would like to
 
 I 20 The Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 know how they suit you, and, if they are unsatisfactory, to arrange for 
 
 something which will tie right. I have confidence in the ability of our 
 
 house to give you satisfaction, if you will but exercise some patience 
 
 with us. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 16. 
 
 I. M. Smith, Esq. , 
 
 L08 Angeles. 
 Sir: 
 
 I have yours of March 1 concerning the dismissal of John Jones, who 
 was in the service of this company up to Saturday last. I am sorry to 
 say we have been much annoyed by Jones for several months past, because 
 of his seeming inability to receive the dictation of his superior offi- 
 cer. He is a man of no small capacity in his own line, and we feel 
 loath to lose him. He seems, however, to have taken a dislike to the 
 foreman who is in charge of the lower mill, and last week became so 
 stubborn in disposition as to make it impossible for us to continue him 
 in the service of the company. As I have said above, we feel sorry to 
 lose him, and even now we would be willing to take him back again if we 
 had any confidence in his power to keep himself in due subjection to 
 those to whom he ought to give loyalty and obedience. You will readily 
 recognize how necessary a condition this is in a concern like ours, ana 
 how impossible it would be for us to fail to take action in such a case 
 
 as his. 
 
 Yours truly.
 
 Lesson XXXIIL— The Small AAT-hook. 
 
 167. The Small W-hook. — A small hook at the be- 
 ginning of ' X .—. and ._, represents w. The 7<.''-hook is 
 written with involute motion before x (see group i) and 
 on the concave side of the curves (see group 2). 
 
 168. Vocalization of Outlines Containing the W- 
 hook. — Vowels must always be written and read with refer- 
 ence to the stroke, and not to the hook, to which a vowel 
 can never be placed. 
 
 169. Rules for Writing the Stroke and Hook 
 Forms of \V. — When a word begins with 7v, and the next 
 following consonant is /, ray, m or ;/, use the 7£'-hook (see 
 groups I and 2); except when the w is followed by two con- 
 secutive vowels one of which is accented (see group 3). 
 When a word begins with a vowel, followed by w, use the 
 stroke. See group 4. 
 
 170. Medial Use of the Small W-hook. — The small 
 7<;'-hook is most useful at the beginning of words, but it may 
 be used in the middle of outlines if better forms are secured 
 by such use. See group 5. 
 
 171. S Before the W-hook. — ^^'hen s precedes iv it 
 may be represented by the small circle written within the 
 hook. See group 6. 
 
 172. Hw, — When h precedes 7i> it may be indicated by 
 slightly shading the hook. See group 7, and compare 
 paragraph 71.
 
 122 The PJionographic Amanuensis. 
 
 Exercise LXXII. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 j/ v/ •<;/ \y v^ V^ V 
 
 V-1. V^ 
 
 A^ n: a. 
 
 -i^ 
 
 6 e.^ ^ '^<^: .>^_._.£ r! r: i::!...^ 
 
 :S 
 
 Exercise LXXIII. 
 
 To he written in phonoyrapliy. 
 
 1. War, wire, wary, wiry, wares, wires, worn, worried, work, worship, 
 warden, warranty, war-horse. 
 
 2. Wail, wool, wooly, willow, ween, win, wan, winnow, won, Wales, 
 woolen, wince, wolf, wealth, Welsh, William, Wilson (downward-/), wel- 
 fare, windy, window, wench, windier, wantonness. 
 
 3. Wooer, Wianno. 
 
 4. Aware, aweary. 
 
 5. Outworn, unworthy, unworn, unwelcome, Irwin. 
 
 6. Swore, swarm, swarthiness, swell, swallow, swallowed, swam, 
 swimming, swoon, swine. 
 
 7. Wharf, whirl, wheel, while, wlulp, whale bone, whaler, whimsical, 
 whimiy.
 
 Lesson XXXIV.— The Small W-hook. 
 -Sentence-writing. 
 
 173. Logograms. — (y^ where, .; when, ,- woman. 
 
 174. Contractions. — v^^ whensoever, ^xA^ whereso- 
 ever. ^ 
 
 175. Phrases. — c^we-are, .;'^' we-are-in-receipt (of), 
 <y^ we-remain, ,:^Vr> with-reference (to), ,j/''\ with re- 
 spect (to), we-will, 6--^we-may, ^r^ we -must, q_^ we know. 
 
 176. Business Letters.^ 
 
 Exercise LXXIV. 
 
 -...- -...a:^ ..A_...r:^".r^ 
 
 123
 
 124 The Phonographic Ainanuensis. 
 
 L 
 
 f 
 
 i8. 
 
 ,„ cz..^ V-:! \^ c. °:^.^ • c:".. ^ \- 
 
 r v_ !± 
 
 H 
 
 ,,).. 
 
 c 
 
 t • ^ ^ ^ A ^ h 
 
 ^ X _ / L 
 
 *x (:r=s^ 
 
 u ^ r^ ^ 
 
 -^ 1 U * - -A cZ^ 
 
 Nzz: '-^■^^ t ^' 
 
 ' ^ -s f\^-^ ^ '^■■ 
 
 I ^^-.^ ^ ■ -X:>1 Si?" -^ 
 
 : ._„..'2i..^ .i^.„.v. cs^. "x^ -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ** f-- 
 
 19 
 
 ,„^ 
 
 ,c2. -u^ L_^,/r^a< .':^- rz,,-::^, 
 
 '2-... :\_ I L -^ f V, 28 1 ~~x -a 
 
 c ' 
 
 ^n J , ^ L^iczi^^
 
 The Small IV- hook. — Sentence-writing. 125 
 
 17- 
 
 Mr. J, W. Wolf. , 
 
 Wilmington, Del. 
 Sir: 
 
 We are in receipt of yours of the 4th, with reference to the oak 
 
 ties which you wish us to have in readiness for inspection by the first 
 of November. We see no way in which we can have any of our mills at 
 work in time to make up all the ties by November 1; but we know we can 
 have them all on the wharf and ready for inspection before the month of 
 November runs out. It is impossible to say just how long it will take 
 to finish the work, and we may have all the ties ready for you early in 
 the month. At any rate, you may rest positive we are doing our best for 
 you, and we will do whatever can well be done to hasten the work. 
 Hoping this will be satisfactory, we remain 
 Yours truly. 
 
 Mr. William Warren, 
 
 Peoria, 111, 
 Sir: 
 
 The Williams case has been set for next Wednesday at one p. m. 
 We shall ask for a continuance of the case, however, so it will be un- 
 necessary for you to come then, as our motion will be allowed by the 
 judge. We will inform you whensoever the case comes up again, which we 
 think will be no earlier than next fall, so you can leave the city at 
 your convenience. We must warn you, nevertheless, to give us informa- 
 tion as to where you are at all times, and how we can reach you whereso- 
 ever you may be, and you must be in readiness to come back, with no de- 
 lay, at any time we give you notice by mail or wire. The woman who was 
 to testify on behalf of Williams has never been seen since she was in 
 Toledo in February last, but we must be ready for her to turn up at any 
 time. The two women who testify for us will be ready whenever the case 
 
 shall come to a hearing. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 19. 
 
 William Warner, Esq,, 
 
 Lawrence, Mass. 
 Sir: ,_ . 
 
 I am the representative of the United States Mining Company, which 
 has its case set for the 28th of this month in Cheyenne, Wyo. William
 
 126 TJic Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 Wilson is the lawyer who represents the company in Wyoming, and he has 
 given me notice to-day, saying he has cases set which will make it im- 
 possible for him to give us any assistance with respect to the hearing 
 at Cheyenne. I know of no lawyer in Cheyenne who can give the necessary 
 attention to this case for the United States Mining Company, and in 
 these circumstances ask you to postpone the hearing for sixty or ninety 
 days, when we can be represented as we ought to be. 
 Yours respectfully,
 
 Lesson XXXV.— The L-hook. 
 
 177. Double Consonants — L-series.— A may com- 
 bine with any preceding consonant so as to unite closely with 
 it in a single syllable. Such double consonants are heard at 
 the beginning of such words 2& play, blue, fly, etc. 
 
 178. The L-hook. — These double consonants formed by 
 / are represented in phonography by attaching a small initial 
 involute hook to the stroke consonant which precedes the /. 
 The /-hook is regularly attached to the following strokes only: 
 
 \ //, \ bl, \ fl, \ dl, f c-hl, / jl, .__ /'/, ^_ gl, ^ /, 
 
 V vl, I ////, ( dill, cJ shl. sill is always ^\■ritten upward 
 and never stands alone, but must be joined to some other 
 stroke, as it would otherwise be read s/i/i. (Compare para- 
 graph 136). These double consonants must be considered as 
 indivisible compounds in which the hook does not separately 
 represent /. In speaking of them, each should be named by 
 a single syllable. Thus: \ is//, and should be named by 
 the sound heard in the second syllable of the word ap-ple, 
 and not pcc-el, which would indicate \/ . 
 
 179. Rules for the Use of the L-hook and the 
 
 Stroke-1. — (<0 When no vowel occurs between /and the 
 preceding consonant, use the hook. See group i. (/■) When 
 a distinct vowel is heard between / and the preceding con- 
 sonant, the stroke-/ must be used, as in \/ pole, ' keel, 
 
 etc. (c) When an unaccented, short or obscure vowel is 
 heard between the / and the preceding consonant, the /-hook 
 is used and the vowel is not expressed. See group 2. 
 
 127
 
 128 The Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 180. Imperfect Hooks.— When the /-hook appears in 
 the middle of an outline, it can not always be made perfect 
 in form, but must sometimes adapt itself to the preceding 
 stroke as a slight offset, more or less closely resembling the 
 form of the perfect hook. See group 3. 
 
 181. Tick-h before L-hook. — The tick-/^ may be used 
 before /-hook double consonants whenever it can be con- 
 veniently joined. See group 4. 
 
 Exercise LXXV. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 Exercise LXXVI. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 I. Plea, ply, blow, clay, glee, glue, flay, flew, please, blaze, close, 
 fleece, flows, classes, blest, fleeced, plaster, plan, clean, glean, flown, cliff", 
 completion, pluck, plum, blot, bleach, clip, clutch, cloth, climb, clear, 
 glare, flame, fluffy, blossom, fla.x, planet.
 
 The L-liook. 129 
 
 2. Apple, eagle, evil, Ethel, tipple, maple, stubble, legible, chattel, 
 dawdle, chemical, obstacle, bugle, shuffle, muffle, devil, weevil, ofhcia', 
 special. 
 
 3. Couple, gobble, terrible, battle, Mitchell, shackle, uncle, wriggle, 
 reflect, level, snuffle, novel. 
 
 4. Huddle, hobble, hovel.
 
 Lesson XXXVI.— The L-hook.— Sen- 
 tence-writing. 
 
 182. Logograms. — \ people, \ able, belonged, 
 
 'v ^ r p I r 
 
 >, balance, \> belief-ve, | tell, | till, until, I, twelve, 
 
 r — ^ V 
 
 I deliver-ed, call,.- difficult-y, V full-y, followed, 
 
 ..^ value -d. 
 
 183. Contractions 
 
 fornia. 
 
 \^ capable-ility, V_ Cali- 
 
 184. Phrases. — T- please-advise, ^^ _^ „ we-inclose, 
 
 ,i? — D first-class. 
 
 185. Special Forms. — 
 
 oblige, „^_^ Q inclose, 
 
 186. Business Letters.- 
 
 > 
 
 inclosure. 
 
 Exercise LXXVII. 
 
 2Q 
 
 : L^,.. : N. ^ \,..
 
 1 he L-lwok. — SciUeHce-wrUiug . 
 
 I3> 
 
 v^ r^ :^s,' f 1 
 
 ; ^ >A 
 
 Y 
 
 \q_P 
 
 ...ft.. t \j..^. z±:. 
 
 X ^ ^. .::?^ .t4 ^ 
 
 f 
 
 ^.x 
 
 ...U/.., 
 
 ,„^„ 
 
 A^. :^.. 
 
 
 .^.....U-TT,^ A.. 
 
 •^P 
 
 ) 
 
 ^ Vp l ^ ix 
 
 ° ^ )a: ::"::^ \^ 
 
 f ^ .L. X, ^ -^ 
 
 .c... 
 
 
 ^ --^ " " -> ' ^^ ^ ^ 
 
 £x L:^A. L ^ ^ I Z ^^1 ^ 
 
 -^^ - I \ c 
 
 = °^ - ' ^ t ^ F ^ ^ f 1 ^ 5, 
 
 iC. v^ ::m : ^ : i^ >^ ^ ^s^., _ 
 
 k ^ ^ ^-.^X ^ ^^ I C "^ ^ Q^ 
 
 =-^-^ -^^^ -^ ^ ^^ =1 ^-
 
 132 The PJioiiographic Amanuensis. 
 
 
 ^ ' ^ Y J ^^7 ' ^ 
 
 '■A ^ l^ S.,~»^J L— ,^ SQ_^ V-,.. 
 
 ..r ^ u^. r / I \c^, 
 
 \-^ ^ >f- - 
 
 2Z. 
 
 20. 
 
 Mr. 0. W. Clayton, 
 
 Superior, Wis. 
 Sir: 
 
 We are in receipt of yours of May 23, with inclosure of bill of 
 
 lading, twelve cars wheat flour, Superior to Mobile, Ala., asking us for 
 a rate of $14.50 a car. I am sorry to say no one of our people here is 
 capable of making you this rate. The best we are able to do for you In
 
 TJic L-Jiook. — Sentence-writing. 133 
 
 this office is $15 delivered at Mobile. We will write to General Hop- 
 ple, however, and inclose a copy of the bill of lading, and should he 
 allow this special rating, you will receive a rebate of S6. 
 
 We hope we may succeed in obtaining; this rating for you, as we 
 value your business highly. 
 
 Yours truly. 
 
 Mr. U. M. Playfair, 
 
 21. 
 
 Jacksonville, Fla. 
 Sir: 
 
 We can see no use in waiting till next week upon Blackie, as it is 
 now fully six weeks since he has given any attention to business, and ho 
 seems to have no capability for making any exertion. The difficulty is 
 with Clancy, of Atlanta, in closing up the business of the glue company 
 by buying the stock still belonging to you. We have been hoping you 
 would write to Clancy and tell him how things are, and use your influ- 
 ence with him to obtain his compliance with this suggestion. It is our 
 belief it would be a first-class way of adjusting a rather difficult 
 piece of business and of disposing fairly of all conflicting claims. 
 The stock which belonged to Healey has been bought in this way, and the 
 same plan should be followed in your case, and yours should be valued 
 the same as his. We saw Blackie at his house last Saturday, and he said 
 he had been sick and had placed the whole business in charge of Floyd, 
 with full power to sign for him. And now it seems Floyd is in Savannah. 
 This being the case, we think we will place in the "Sun" a call for the 
 election of officers, and we inclose herewith a form of notice for the 
 1st of February. If the day chosen fails to suit you, we would suggest 
 to you to change it, and inform us by wire of the change. Then please 
 deliver the form to Martin and tell him to sign it and have it published 
 in some Jacksonville daily, each day until the day of the election. 
 
 Please advise us when you have done all this, and oblige 
 Yours truly, 
 
 Mr. D. F. Peebles, 22. 
 
 Los Angeles, Cal. 
 Sir: 
 
 Replying to yours of June 8, we wire you to-day to tell you we will 
 mail you a few samples of our key blanks at once, and a full line will 
 follow within a few days. We have none as small as one-half inch, but 
 we will mail you a few one-inch samples for your inspection. On the de- 
 livery of these samples to you, if you should be satisfied with them, aa 
 we believe you will be, we would like to name you rates by the thousand. 
 If you have already written out plans and specifications, showing how 
 many and what sizes you will use, we would be happy to receive them, to 
 enable us to form an idea of your necessities. If it will be necessary 
 for you to have any sizes in especial haste, we may be able to arrange 
 to deliver them first and the balance can be delivered whenever you 
 wish . 
 
 Please write us soon and in full, and oblige 
 Yours truly.
 
 Lesson XXXVII.— The R-hook. 
 
 187. Double Consonants.— The R-series.— Just as / 
 
 combines with other consonants, so /- may unite closely with 
 preceding consonants to form a series of double consonants. 
 
 188. The R-hook. — The double consonants of the r- 
 series are represented by attaching a small initial evolute 
 
 hook to the following strokes : \ //-, \ /'/-, 1 /;-, I dr, 
 
 / chr, / jr, ^- kr, <— gr, ^ fr, ^ vr, ) thr, ) dhr, 
 J shr, J zhr. 
 
 189. R-hook on Curved Strokes.— It will be noticed 
 that the combinations of the /--hook with /, v, t/i, dh, are 
 somewhat irregularly formed. These curved /--hook strokes, 
 however, agree exactly with the related straight strokes in this 
 respect — that the r-combinations are simply the correspond- 
 ing /-combinations inverted. If \ // be made of a piece of 
 wire and then turned over, it becomes \/r. In like man- 
 ner V/, turned over, becomes \ fr ; V vl becomes \vr ; 
 C thl becomes ) thr ; ( dhl becomes ) dlir. 
 
 190. Rules for the Use of the R-hook and the 
 Stroke-r. — (</) When no vowel occurs between r and the 
 preceding consonant, use the hook. See group i. (/') 
 When a distinct vowel is heard between rand the preceding 
 
 consonant, the stroke /• nuist be used, as in v.^^ /><?/>-, r:^ tire, 
 
 etc. (r) When an unaccented, short or obscure vowel is 
 heard between the r and the preceding consonant, the hook 
 is used and the vowel is not exijressed. See group 2. 
 
 134
 
 The R-Jiook. 
 
 191. Imperfect Hooks. — T.ike the /-hook, the /-hook, 
 when in the middle of an outline, must sometimes adapt 
 itself to the preceding stroke, forming an imperfect hook. 
 See group 3. 
 
 192. Tick-h before R-hook. — The tick-/? may be joined 
 to an /-hook double consonant whenever convenient. See 
 
 group 4. 
 
 193. Mnemonics for L- and R-hooks.— If the Zeft 
 hand be held up with the first finger crooked, ((^^ 
 the outline of //will appear, and by turning 
 the hand in the various directions of /, /, 
 ch, k, all the double consonants of the /-hook 
 series will be formed. In like manner, the 
 A'ight hand will give the /'-hook series. It 
 may also be remembered that involute motion, 
 
 \\ith which the /-hooks are formed, is "Zeft-hand " motion, 
 and the evolute motion, which forms /--hooks is ''j?ight-hand " 
 motion. 
 
 Exercise LXXVIII. 
 To be read and copied.
 
 136 TJic PJionographic Amanuensis. 
 
 Exercise LXXiX. 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Pray, brew, tree, try, draw, crow, gray, free, fry, shrew, bray, 
 praise, trace, dresses, phrases, breast, dressed, frost, prune, train, frown, 
 brave, grieve, thrice, across, address, oppress, preach, bridge, trip, 
 drought, crawl, freal<, thread, prop, breathe, crumb, bright, driven, pie- 
 pare, trustee, Africa, poetry, fabric. 
 
 2. Upper, acre, ether, usher, utterly, reajjer, clapper, blubber, patter, 
 totter, pleader, poacher, gager, rocker, sugar (upward .f//), coffer, bother, 
 fisher, fiber, labor, leisure, knocker, spatter, clever, improper, increase. 
 
 3. Toper, j<)bl)er, poker, dagger, defray, Dover, wafer, checker, out- 
 break, tiger, taper, joker, tether. 
 
 4. Heater, hatter, hider, huger, heather.
 
 Lesson XXXVIII.— The R-hook.— Sen- 
 tence-writing. 
 
 194. Logograms. — ^ principlc-al-ly, appear, 
 
 .S:\. practise-cal-ly, n remembcr-ed, "X^^ number, 1 truth, 
 
 I dear, 1. during, 1 duration, ,. — care, ^ from, 
 
 > very, every, . . over, ) three, ) there, their, either, 
 
 ^. other, _y sure-ly, >^ pleasure. 
 
 195. Contractions. — h danger, \^ probable-y. Con- 
 tract also all words beginning with the syllable trans- by 
 omitting the //. Thus, -, /nnisif, J_3 transaction. 
 
 196. Special Forms. — \f April, N^/ bushel, 
 \4 barrel. 
 
 197. Phrases. — cL dear-sir, /H regret-to-say, 
 
 Vr^ truly-yours, ^/\ very-respectfully, ^^ \ery-truly, 
 
 ' of-eithcr, ) of -their, \ of -other. 
 
 198. Business Letters. — Titles. — The dictater of a let- 
 ter will often give the name of a railroad by following the collo- 
 quial practise of mentioning the initials of its name, or, some-
 
 o 
 
 8 The PJionograpJiic Amanuaisis. 
 
 times, merely a part of them. In such cases it is usually 
 more convenient for the amanuensis to write down these 
 initials in longhand (for greater brevity using the small 
 letters instead of the capital forms) than it is to write the 
 full title of the railroad company in phonographic characters. 
 In transcribing the notes, judgment will have to be exercised 
 to carry out the intentions of the dictater. The initials may 
 be retained in certain cases in the typewritten letter, or they 
 may have to be expanded to the fully-written title of the 
 company in others, according to the nature of the letter — it 
 being necessary, of course, to write out in full in formal, and 
 especially in legal, communications. For the informal usage 
 see the abbreviations of the names of the 15oston & Albany 
 Railroad and the New York, New Haven and Hartford Rail- 
 road in letter No. 25 below. The same method will some- 
 times apply to names of other corporations and even of firms. 
 
 Exercise LXXX. 
 
 — - 23 
 
 :l!:x. 1 \^ l_^,.^^...r^^^. ]^ ^.. 
 
 r--v ^ ^ ^ ^ V 
 
 1 ^ :v:_ V !^ z^ _ r_ [ J \ .zzLL 
 
 ■^ ^ ^
 
 The R-hook. — Soitcnce-writiiio , 
 
 139 
 
 ^■■j u. ^- - ^ 
 
 ffrr-,.,^J> i» &-/.. VO I (j— 
 
 I X 3 C 
 
 .CL 
 
 ^x 
 
 1 s !ik I -J:^.. 
 
 .24. 
 
 ,r^ 
 
 XI 
 
 --v \. 1 „ _ 
 
 Xr^ c £-. 
 
 5 r: 
 
 xn 
 
 ) 
 
 i_. 
 
 ^■ 
 
 ,z....^. C.„...\. 
 
 V.X /^ 
 
 V, 
 
 ■?^ ^ 
 
 s ■ -^ ^ 
 
 -C ^ X — ^- 
 
 , 1 L izrr« L ^ 
 
 
 '■-^ ' 
 
 ^.^^ , 1 " r:^ ^. ^ -L^ ) 
 
 ...,"^.»^ > :'iw ^» "^ 1 tGa r. 
 
 ■2 ^^x rl'. .i._ .0 J v^ 
 
 \ 
 
 -(■ 
 
 f ~ ^ H 
 
 L 
 
 ■¥■
 
 140 The PJionograpJiic Anuiintcnsis. 
 
 !x d" ^ 1:^4: o... z'....i _ 3^ & : J. 
 
 •\j y r =^x y..^ ^ I 
 
 : _ -: c / \. V.,,:.^ 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 Q^ .=^ ^. 
 
 r 
 
 /I " L. ^1 
 
 „r. 
 
 „=n N 
 
 K 
 
 U 
 
 V ,V^. I\.. 
 
 Q^ 
 
 Ambrose T. Harper, Esq., 23- 
 
 Beaver, Nebraska. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 We are shipping you the fencinc machine to-day, and hope it may ar- 
 rive in plenty of time for the use you wish to make of it boforo tho let
 
 TJic R- J look. — Sentence-zvriting. 141 
 
 of April. We feel very sure you will have no trouble in setting it up 
 and working it, as you are a practical man and have been using machinery 
 which works on the same principle. 
 
 We think it probable there will be sale for a number of other ma- 
 chines in your town, when your neighbors have seen the machine at work, 
 and we would like very much to have you try to sell some for us. We 
 will pay you a commission of $5 on every machine you sell, and will give 
 you the sole agency in your town during the next three months. Should 
 you succeed, as you probably will, in selling as many as twelve machines 
 before the 1st of July, we will give you the agency for any duration of 
 time you may wish up to three years. 
 
 Hoping to have the pleasure of hearing from you at an early day, we 
 
 remain 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 24. 
 
 Andrew Rider , Esq . , 
 
 Birmingham, Ala. 
 My dear Rider: 
 
 I have your favor, stating you are in receipt of a narrow glass 
 sign from our people. I trust you may care to use it, and I think it 
 will appear very well on your wall. I regret very much I was unable to 
 see you the other day, when I was in Birmingham, as I was going to ask 
 you as a favor to me to give us some of the risks which last year you 
 placed in the Prudential, if I remember rightly. I regret to say our 
 books show we had practically no business at all from your agency in 
 April and May, and it would appear as if you were in danger of overlook- 
 ing us altogether. Surely you can favor us with two or three additional 
 risks during this month. This would go far to swell our premiums, and 
 the truth is I am very anxious to have your agency throw over $200 in 
 premiums to the company this year. By doing this you will do me a 
 favor, which I can assure you will be remembered. I write all this now 
 as I shall probably have no occasion to be in Birmingham again for a 
 long time. 
 
 Thanking you for your many past favors, I am as ever 
 Truly yours, 
 
 25- 
 
 Messrs. Overman & Mather, 
 
 Fall River, Mass. 
 Dear Sirs: 
 
 We wire you to-day, saying we ship you a car of bulk cabbage, giv- 
 ing number of car, and we inclose herewith the bill of lading. We hope 
 you may think this a nice car of stock, and if it suits your trade, we 
 can ship you as much as you may have use for. 
 
 Do you prefer to have us ship in bulk or in barrels? We can ship 
 either way, but it is cheaper to ship in bulk, principally because it 
 saves the cost of the barrels, but also because we can place eight or
 
 142 The PJionographic Amamicusis. 
 
 ten bushels additional in a car. For theee reasons we make a general 
 practise of shipping in bulk, but we can give you your choice of either 
 way. 
 
 Please wire us on receipt of car, stating in what condition it 
 reaches you and how the stock suits you. Our principal concern is a 
 fear the car may be delayed by the floods which now prevail in your 
 state, but the B. & A. people tell us all their trains are going right 
 through on time, and there is no probability of a serious delay. 
 
 We will ship a car of apples on Monday by the N. Y., N. H., as the: 
 assure us a saving of at least one day in transit. 
 
 Hoping this transaction may prove wholly satisfactory to you, and 
 bring additional business from you, we remain 
 Yours respectfully,
 
 Lesson XXXIX.— Irregular Double Con- 
 sonants. — Intervocalization. 
 
 199. Irregular Double Consonants. — Since 7v is 
 represented by the small initial hook, attached to ' / /-^ ^^^, 
 (see par. 167) it is evident that the / and r hooks can 
 not be regularly attached to these strokes. The combina- 
 tions cX rl, ,^— ^ ml, Q^ ///, and (^ Ir are therefore dis- 
 tinguished by making the hook large (see group i below), 
 and the combinations r^ iitr and <z^ iir by shading the 
 stroke (see group 2). A large /-hook is also attached to tig 
 to read c;:^. iigL See groui) 3. 
 
 200. Intervocalization of Double Consonants. — 
 Strict adherence to the rules given in paragraphs 179/' and 
 190/^ would sometimes lead to the use of relatively long and 
 awkward outlines, which might be avoided could a vowel be 
 written so as to be read between the two consonants of a 
 double consonant. In such cases intervocalization may be 
 expressed as follows : A small circle lie/ore a double conso- 
 nant stroke represents a heavy dot-vowel read hetivccn the 
 consonants (see group 4); after the stroke it represents a 
 light dot-vowel (see group 5). The dash- vowels, both heavy 
 and light, and the diphthong and coalescent-signs are 
 struck through the doul)le-consonant stroke. See group 6. 
 Should the first- or third-place dash interfere with an initial 
 or final hook or circle, place it just before the beginning, 
 or just after the end, of the hooked stroke. An inter- 
 vocalized r-hook sign is regularly used in writing words 
 like those in group 7, in which the vowel is an accented I'l. 
 Words beginning with r-l are also regularly written with 
 
 143
 
 144 The PJionographic Amanuensis. 
 
 intervocalized forms. In other cases intervocalization should 
 be used sparingly, and it is justified only by an obvious gain 
 in convenience in forming an outline. 
 
 Exercise LXXXI. 
 
 To be read and copied 
 
 3 
 
 5-- 
 
 -=^ W^ i. Vp.. 
 
 ^ ^ ^- ^ 
 
 ri^ X ^ v^ i^. 4. 
 
 /A 1 
 
 i:^. L Jr. !r ^ 
 
 tJC "^ 
 
 ,1:^ =1 Lf /^ -U - ■ 
 
 ^ t; ^ ^ 
 
 .^4,^^'^ ,^ -^ I>:^ 
 
 -^iL \-^ ^^ =2 2:: ^...^^,. 
 
 t/^ 
 
 °oA. 
 
 t^^ 
 
 Exercise LXXXI a. 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 I. Ferule, spiral, carol, ruraliicss, camel, animal, penal, channel, final, 
 penalty, kennel, nominal, signal, color, cooler, killer, scholar.
 
 Irregular Double Consonants. 145 
 
 2. Plumber, clamor, grammar, rumor, former, schemer, calmer, ban- 
 ner, tanner, assigner, minor, tenor, funeral, trainer, generous. 
 
 3. Absorbingly, alarmingly, alluringly, appetizingly, shufflingly, spar- 
 ingly. 
 
 4. Partial, bargain, barter, cardinal, cartoon, darling, chairmanship 
 
 5. Paralyze, direction, locality, analogy, telephone. 
 
 6. Autliority, learner, Gordon, corporation, divulge, portray, moral, 
 porcelain, colony, agriculture, circular, capture, lecture, culture. 
 
 7. Nerve, occur, attorney, burden, church, curse, verb, burglar. 
 
 8. Roll, rolling, unroll, rail, railway, rule, rulable, relative, relish, re- 
 lease, releasing, relied, reliably, relic, religion.
 
 Lesson XL. — Irregular Double Conso- 
 nants. — Sentence-writing. 
 
 201. Logograms. — CL- only, Q_p unless, Mr. 
 
 reniark-ed-able-y, (T^ more, . near, nor, real-ly. 
 
 202. Contractions. — character, n character- 
 
 istic, V (leterniine (1, h determination, — ^-"^ commercial-ly. 
 203. Special Forms. — t^-^ — America, (T^^-—, Amer- 
 
 ican, I qiiahty. 
 
 204. Phrases. — in-our, I in-receipt (of), Vd in- 
 
 reference (to), \. in rei)ly (to), \ in-respect (to), 
 
 \, in-response (to), (O North-Carolina. 
 
 205. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise LXXXII. 
 
 _..__ 26 „ 
 
 U 
 
 "C^x ^^^-^ ^ \^ !v:.7-v 
 
 ,^^_ _^ "^ __ _v 
 
 146
 
 Irregular Double Consonants. 
 
 \ X__ \ / >»w-. 
 
 c 
 
 ■J-S 
 
 r^ -\ ;& n 
 
 ~" "^ °lC "^ 
 
 No 
 
 ./ ^ .'s. \. 
 
 :^ I . 
 
 ■•^' 
 
 X t ° ^ 
 
 5IQ. 
 
 [ c / , c I c ":: L / ] n ^.... \ ^in 
 
 J "^^ .^ ^ k, c. <^. . ^ .1050 K ^ _»_ _ 
 
 L^ ^^ c /^^ ^ C, 
 
 14 
 
 v x:^ • ^ -^ 
 
 - Q^ ^ ^ \^\ 
 
 ^ "^^ !i "^^ f 
 
 27 
 
 : v...N^v'^.. 
 
 !i:, : .v.. V 
 
 1 
 
 1^ 
 
 I .^ .i^ 
 
 .'^ 1 
 
 n 
 
 ,%,_.x. 
 
 -V 
 
 3^ 
 
 .,n ..^ 
 
 <-=.«- 
 
 k 
 
 r 
 r 
 
 1 
 
 !\ L ) r::. c/ ' v ^ ^ 
 
 ' V-^ S ' ^ ^ '^ ^ "^ N-^
 
 148 The PJionographic Amamiensis. 
 
 1 ^ x^.u 
 
 ,\^.. 
 
 : 1 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 1 "It ^ S ^ \^« V ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ h 
 
 ' ^ ^,,..1,..': ,^ x^..„_ 
 
 ^ ^ C r:7 ^ 
 
 - ^.„V-„.,„ /C. ( L- 1 _ 
 
 -J - -^ " p' - -• 
 
 28 
 
 ^ W ' ? 
 
 w^ )- ^ 1' <^ "^ « i- ^..^ 
 
 ° . ^ ' :^ _ I- ^ ^/" 
 
 •^ 
 
 i 
 
 J ^ __,.. L^. z 
 
 r 
 
 ^^ ^ H ^■■ 
 
 cL 1- 1 u ^ i^ ■^l-j^ -V-/:::^ --^x. 
 
 /:. "ri :. _. j^. ^^!:i^..!^ : .zs^., i ^.// 
 
 ..^ _ _^ rZ ^ 
 
 ^ ' ^ ^ ^« F
 
 Irre<ridar Double Consonants. 149 
 
 26. 
 
 Mr. Abner H. Campbell, Manager, 
 
 American Ice Machine Company, Raleigh, N. C. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 We are to-day in receipt of your favor of April 27, in reference to 
 the 'items in our charge for setting up new stack, moving the stack now 
 in use to its new location across the railroad, and moving the iron col- 
 umn to its new position. In reply, we beg leave to say we have careful- 
 ly gone over the sixth clause in our proposition of March 15, with a 
 view to determining in detail the precise cost of these items. The 
 charge now appears to have been more than it should have been. By doing 
 the work ourselves and shipping by boat instead of railway it will cost 
 us only $480 instead of $510, the price which was first placed upon it. 
 The difference, as you will remark, is really very small, and we wish it 
 were larger, but such as it is, we will give you the full advantage of 
 it, and will do work of the highest quality at this price, making a to- 
 tal for the whole job of $1050. We can make no allowance for the boil- 
 er, as it is now commercially valueless. 
 
 We believe this proposal will be satisfactory to you, and unless wo 
 hear from you by telegraph on Thursday in relation to it, we shall go 
 ahead with the work as previously determined upon. 
 Yours truly, 
 
 27. 
 Hon. Elmer F. Palmer, 
 
 San Francisco, Cal . 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 I have your favor of the 14th in respect to the schedule of busi- 
 ness for the North American Insurance Company. In response, I assure 
 you I will do my best to secure the renewal of every risk in the list, 
 and I hope I may be successful. I notice you give me a list for Novem- 
 ber and December only. I think it would be well for you to furnish me 
 with a list from the first of January, so I may learn just what is to be 
 done and have plenty of time to work it up, as I feel every confidence 
 we can obtain the renewal of most of this business, perhaps all of it, 
 if proper attention is given to it. Mr. Bonner is working on it now 
 with characteristic energy, and it is my determination to follow it up 
 personally. 
 
 I fail to grasp the meaning of the last paragraph of your communi- 
 cation, which says, "Wo wish no attention to be paid to the claims of 
 any person upon it." Please inform me just what you mean by this. I 
 know most of the brokers who place those risks, and, as I remarked be- 
 fore, I believe there should be no real difficulty in securing every 
 risk on the list. 
 
 I am much pleased to see the remarkable increase in the year's bus- 
 iness as a whole. I think it is safe to say no other agency in America 
 can show a like growth in the same time. 
 Yours truly.
 
 150 The PJionogi^apJiic Ainauuensis. 
 
 28. 
 
 Messrs. O'Connell & Farrell, 
 
 Jersey City, N. J. 
 Dear Sirs: 
 
 In looking over your balances for the months of December and Jan- 
 uary, we see they have been remarkably small. We have, on several pre- 
 vious occasions, spoken to you on this subject, and we write you now be- 
 cause if the subject of loans to your firm were now to come before our 
 directors, they would be almost sure to decide against a continuance of 
 such favors. In view of the character of our past relations, and of the 
 high commercial rating of your firm, we have hitherto taken no especial 
 notice of your failure to keep up your balances, nor do we now desire to 
 appear harsh or arbitrary. It is, however, really due to ourselves to 
 urge you again to keep your balances of such a size as will enable us to 
 carry the loans on a fair business basis. 
 Yours truly,
 
 Lesson XLI. — Triple Consonants. — Spl- 
 series. 
 
 206. Triple Consonants. — When s precedes a double 
 consonant, a triple consonant is formed, as heard at the be- 
 ginning of the words s/Ars/i, s/'ray, etc. This is expressed in 
 phonography by writing the circle within the hook. Those 
 triple consonants formed by writing s within the /-hook are 
 said to belong to the ^//-series of triple consonants. 
 
 207. Vocalization of Triple Consonants. — When a 
 vowel is written after a triple consonant, it is read last (see 
 group i); but when it is placed before, it is read after the s 
 and before the double consonant (see group 2). 
 
 208. Medial Triple Consonants. — Triple consonants 
 are frequently found in the middle of words, and in such 
 cases the circle may represent z as well as s. See group 3. 
 
 209. Imperfect Triple Consonants. — When a circle 
 is written within an imperfect double-consonant hook (see 
 paragraph 180), the circle can not be perfectly formed and 
 written completely within the hook. It nuist, in such cases, 
 be lengthened into a loop so as to indicate the hook as dis- 
 tinctly as possible. See group 4. 
 
 Exercise LXXXIII. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 Z K \ 
 
 ...^V, KjyiK V 1 V 
 
 ■iL X -^ \ 
 
 '°7 
 
 '51
 
 152 The PhoiiograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 \_ "S^ ^ : i— ^v - V <^;- 4v; '^ 
 
 "\'l ' : ' - - 
 
 L. 
 
 Exercise LXXXIV. 
 To be written in phonogiapliy 
 
 1. Splay, spliced, splicer, splash, splasher, spleen, splotchy, splutterer. 
 
 2. Supple, settle, sickle, swivel, satchel, civilize, civilizing, sublime, 
 suulimity, cyclopedia, settler, sicklier. 
 
 3. Display, discipline, noticeable, classical, physical, plausible, exclaim, 
 l)ressingly, disbelieve, displaced, ])ossible. 
 
 4. Explore, explosion, visibly, fusible, explain, invisible, encyclopedia, 
 r;xplanation, exj)loration, ineffaceable, refusable.
 
 Lesson XLII. — Triple Consonants. — Spr- 
 series. 
 
 210. Spr-series. — Triple consonants formed by writing 
 s within an r-hook are said to belong to the j/r series. They 
 are vocalized precisely like those of the jr/Z-series. See 
 group I. 
 
 211. Spr-series Medial.— When the triple consonants 
 of the j/»;--series are written medially, the circle may repre- 
 sent z as well as .y. See group 2. 
 
 212. Imperfect Triple Consonants.— («') Triple con- 
 sonants of the i/r-series must sometimes be written imper- 
 fectly. See group 3. (/?) A few words are written with an 
 imperfect sfr within the //-hook. See group 4. (r) In writ- 
 ing a few words it is necessary to write the circle on the out- 
 side of the preceding curve, contrary to the general rule. 
 See group 5. 
 
 213. Irregular Triple Consonants. — When sh-, sgr, 
 sfr, or svr follows / or d, and when spr or sbr follows ch ox j, 
 the loop becomes so imperfect that it is no longer practicable 
 to write it, and the forms are therefore written irregularly, as 
 shown in group 6. 
 
 214. Initial Spr-series. — When a circle precedes a 
 straight double consonant of the /--hook series at the begiiuiin^^ 
 of a v'onf, it is not necessary to write it within the hook, but 
 the circle may simply be written on the evolute side of the 
 stroke. See group 7. There is no danger of reading this 
 as simple circle-j-, as the latter is always written with involute 
 motion. See paragraphs 100 and loi. 
 
 153
 
 154 The PJwnograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 215. Quadruple Consonants. — At the beginning of a 
 word the \oo\i-st may be expressed as preceding a straight 
 stroke of the r-hook series by writing the loop with evolute 
 motion. See group 8. 
 
 Exercise LXXXV. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 3 !r, '±^ \. 
 
 ■=^ ^ Vf 
 
 4. 
 6U 
 
 
 
 ,..1!Q, 
 
 1-^ 
 
 K K S- ^ ^ 
 
 t. I Y ^.^ ^_ u. 4 L. 
 
 ]• L~.„,u \^ ;i ]- ^.- ^ ^ -^ >v 3 ^ 
 
 x 
 
 ..:^.,. 
 
 ± "^ °^ 
 
 
 \ N ^ -. ^ ^-^
 
 Triple Consonants. — Spr-scrics. 155 
 
 Exercise LXXXVI. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Suffer, sever, sooner, simmer, sufferer, southerly, saffron, savor, suf- 
 ferance, summer. 
 
 2. Prosper, reciprocity, pastoral, boisterous, distress, extremity, lus- 
 trous, masterly, abstraction, besieger, extra, dishonor, fixture, solicitor, 
 prosperous, blusterer, mixture, bestrew, designer, dextrous, extraction, 
 orchestra, receiver. 
 
 3. Disburse, proscribe, massacre, disprove, disapprobation, prescription, 
 subscription, disproportion, disburden, registration, masker. 
 
 4. Monster, monstrosity, demonstration, denionstrativeness, minstrel, 
 demonstrable, monstrousness. 
 
 5. Vesper, masonry, nostrum, .sophistry, songstress. 
 
 6. Descry, disgrace, decipher, jasper disgraced, cheese-press, de- 
 cipherable. 
 
 7. Spray, sprig, sprawl, straw, strew, strive, screw, stress, scrape, 
 scrawl, straddle, strange, strap, streak, strength, stricken, strike, strip, 
 stroke, strong, Strang, sapper, saber, setter, cedar, swagger, sicker, 
 sweeter, suppress, suppressed, secretion, citron, sacred, sacrifice, soprano, 
 superficial, Socrates, Sacramento, supervision, soberness, superfluous, super- 
 sede, supervise. 
 
 8. Stopper, stouter, stager, stagger, stutteringly, stacker, stepper, stag- 
 geringly.
 
 Lesson XLIII. — Triple Consonants. — 
 Sentence-writing. 
 
 216. Logogram. — surprise. 
 
 217. Contractions. — \, passenger, / messenger. 
 
 218. Phrase Forms. — i_ District-of-Columbia, 
 
 list-price, O South-Carolina, ^ yours-very-truly. 
 
 219. Special Form. — / Louisville. 
 
 220. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise LXXXVII. 
 
 29 
 
 ../.„ 
 
 
 xz?. L "s. 
 
 ^ I ' 
 
 ...crs^ 
 
 7 L 
 
 ~^ 
 
 /l 
 
 X- 
 
 ^ ^ V 
 
 3Q 
 
 S^O. L i^i^i^x ^ U 
 
 156
 
 Triple Consonants. — Scnlcticc-writing. 157 
 
 29. 
 
 Messrs. Sprague & Stratton, Stationers, 
 
 Washington, D. C. 
 Dear Sirs: 
 
 We inclose herewith copy for train book on which we would like you 
 to make ua a price, stating how soon you can finish at least a portion
 
 15S The PJionograpJiic Aiuaiiucnsis. 
 
 of them. We believe full directions are given on the copy which will 
 enable you to make us a fair offer. Please give us your proposition in 
 writing, together with the copy, by messenger, at the earliest possible 
 time. If possible we would like to have the work begin to-morrow. Your 
 early attention will oblige 
 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 30. 
 
 F. A. Strong, Esq . , 
 
 Charleston, S. C. 
 My dear Strong: 
 
 You will probably feel some surprise on hearing from me from this 
 place. I will be back in Louisville Saturday. You will remember we had 
 some conversation last week in respect to the use of heavy engines on 
 some of the passenger trains. It now seems to me it would be best to 
 have the heavier engine on train 295 instead of 260. Train 260 nevor 
 runs heavy from Strasburg to Spring Valley, and there ought to be no 
 trouble west of Spring Valley. Train 295 is the most difficult train to 
 manage we have on the division, and if it fails to reach Spring Valley 
 on time it throws out train 190. You will oblige mo vory much by any- 
 thing you may do to remedy the difficulty I have spoken of. 
 Yours faithfully, 
 
 Mr. T. K. Striker, 
 
 Denver, Colo. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 We have much pleasure in inclosing herewith a copy of our wholeealt. 
 price-list of springs. We are in hopes we shall be able to supply j'lst 
 what you desire out of our very large stock of springs, but if you 
 should be unable to make a selection from tha list, please inform us- 
 etating the precise length and resistance you wish, and we will make you 
 some special figures. If you can use any of our stock springs, we will 
 allow you one-half off the list price, and will ship prepaid by express. 
 
 Hoping we may hear from you at an early day, we remain 
 Yours very truly,
 
 Lesson XLIV. — Backward N-hook. — 
 Large W-hook. 
 
 221. Backward N-hook. — A small backward hook may 
 be written through the stroke before any straight triple con- 
 sonant of the spr series to rejiresent the syllables in-, en-, nn-. 
 See group i. In like manner the backward //-hook may be 
 written before an evolute circle attached initially to a curve. 
 See group 2. 
 
 222. Large W-hook. — A large, initial, involute, hook 
 may be attached to the strokes /, d, k, g, to represent the 
 combinations fiti, dn>, kw, giv. See group 3. 
 
 223. Medial Tw, Dw, Kw, Gw. — In the middle of a 
 word the hook should be used only when it is convenient to 
 join (see group 4); but it should be omitted if the joining 
 would be difificult or inconvenient (see group 5). 
 
 224. Phonetic Spelling'. — It is sometimes difficult for 
 beginners to analyze words which in the ordinary spelling 
 contain the letters qii. The difficulty will disappear when it 
 is understood that the sounds always represented by these let- 
 ters are really k^o. 
 
 225. Circle Before the Large W-hook. — Circle-^^ 
 may precede the large 7t:'-hook by being written entirely 
 within the hook. See group 6. 
 
 Exercise LXXXVIII. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 , U .!i\^ .!=:>^. ^x 
 
 159
 
 l6o Tile Phonograpltic Aiiianuaisis. 
 
 2.„l^, a^.. /^ T.. rN. 
 
 ^_„ u:r'... .*X ^a: 
 
 3 £ ^... £^ L ^- f: .'^' t 12 t2^ 
 
 - ^ ^ ' 
 
 L) 
 
 C-^ <^ 
 
 i\ ^ 5: lX '^ tn. 
 
 4 ^ fc 
 
 Exercise LXXXIX. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Insuperable, unsuppressible, unsupprest, instruction, instrumentahst, 
 unstretchable, inscribe, unscrupulous, unscriptural. 
 
 2. Incise, insatiable, insalubrity, insulation, insolvency, enslave, insur- 
 rectionary, unceremonious, unsurmised unseemly, unsympathetic, un- 
 smitten, unsolicitous. 
 
 3. Twig, twice, twist, twine, twitter, tweak, twinkle, dwelling, dwarfish, 
 Dwight, queer, quid, quoth, quail, quest, quince, Quaker, quack, qualm, 
 queenly, quiver, quicken, quiet, quirk, quarrel, Quincy, quadroon, quarry, 
 quaver, quickly, equalize, equip, equilibrium, acquisition, equity, equally. 
 
 4. Require, requisition, iniquity, language, inquisition, inadequacy. 
 
 5. Esquire, untwist, indwelling 
 
 6. Squaw, squab, squash, sequestration, sequence, disquisition, obse- 
 quious, exquisitely.
 
 Lesson XLV. — The Halving Principle. — 
 Simple Strokes. 
 
 226. The Halving Principle. — By writing a light stroke 
 half its usual length the consonant / is added. See group i. 
 By writing a heavy stroke half its usual length the consonant 
 ^/ is added. See grouj) 2. 
 
 227. Vocalization of Half-length Strokes. — A 
 
 vowel before a half-length stroke is read first. A vowel 
 after a half-length stroke is read next after the primary let- 
 ter but before the added t or d. See groups i and 2. 
 
 228. Position of Half-length Strokes. — Horizontal 
 half-length strokes are written in position precisely as are 
 horizontal full lengths. Upright and slanting half-lengths 
 are written in position, as follows: first position, immediately 
 below, and touching, the upper line ; second position, resting 
 on the lower line; third position, immediately below, and 
 touching, the lower line. 
 
 229. Halving of L, R, M, and N. — The strokes 
 ( ( .— N ,_^ are halved regularly to add t (see group 3), and 
 they may also be written half length and shaded to add d 
 (see group 4). The strokes lu, y, nip and ng cannot, there- 
 fore, be written half lerigth. Ld r is written down. 
 
 230. Joinings of Half-length Strokes. — A half- 
 length stroke can generally be attached to another stroke only 
 when it joins at a distinct angle. See group 5. If, however, 
 the half-length stroke be a heavy curve, it may be attached to 
 a light stroke even without an angle. See group 6.. - 
 
 II 161
 
 1 62 TJie PJionographic Amanuensis. 
 
 231. Halved Ray. — Ray -^ may be halved whenever it 
 is joined to some other stroke (see group 7), but the half- 
 length ray cannot stand alone. Words like rate y^\ and 
 write /vl must be written in full. 
 
 232. Half-length S. — When half-length j- ends an out- 
 line it may be written upward, if more convenient. See 
 group 8. 
 
 233. Limits of Position-writing. — An outline which 
 contains two strokes, one of which is halved, is regarded as 
 being a long outline so far as position-writing is concerned, 
 and need not be written in position unless, indeed, it is a 
 derivative word which takes the position of its primitive. 
 
 Exercise XC. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 , •' '1. t L^^..!: :^: >. !: ^.- ^^ ^^ --- 
 
 z^v , A h i; "T „ ': X.. 
 
 ■■;;)• "■ " ^^- 
 
 7^ ^ T T 
 
 3 ^. 
 
 4../N Z\ iL (T ^ ^ 
 
 i^ ^ ^.. ^ w ^: a, L I. X. 
 
 ^ ^.. \ ^ [V ^ L z ^ r>, 
 
 lt z:^... g :ji I \j^.. .^ "^ <C:.... o., 
 
 b- ^ ^ -f — ^ ^ h ^-
 
 The Halving Principle. — Simple Strokes. 1 63 
 
 6 
 
 7 be v^._.,..C^__^. < \^ 
 
 8 N2 ^ > ^Vi 'M 
 
 -^- 
 
 
 Exercise XCI. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Apt, ached, pat, coat, hacked, aft, caught, hooked, foot, shoot, 
 wished. 
 
 2. Ebbed, egged, bad, goad, hugged, bead, aided, avowed, eased. 
 
 3. Let, ht, hght, meet, neat, naught, night, heart, halt, knit, hurt, 
 naught. 
 
 4. Lead, aired, mead, need, hard, heard, aimed, yard, humid, mode, 
 horde. 
 
 5. Reached, pushed, begged, liushed, eject, active, enjoyed, unaided, 
 provide, pilot, bullet, unhurt, oratory, climate, timid, scold, shared, 
 abashed, attract, clipped, wrapped, hopped, looped, optical, sketched, 
 alleged, damaged, fatigued, morbid, private, reviewed, shelved, surveyed, 
 aromatic, assault, efficient, infinite, maturely, alarmed, availed, crawled, 
 fold, medley, termed. 
 
 6. Card, afford, lowered, maiden, scoured, squared, lured, acquired, 
 slurred, apprehend, cord, declared, inquired, madden, scared. 
 
 7. Parrot, garret, ratify, smart, fortune, ascertain, pirate, reiterate, 
 artificial, chlorate, demerit. 
 
 8. Gruffest, gravest, roughest, finest, oftenest, vainest, briefest.
 
 Lesson XLVL— The Halving Principle.— 
 Sentence-writing — I. 
 
 234. Prefixes. — A disjoined half-length // placed near the 
 beginning of a stroke expresses the prefix enter-, inter-, intro-. 
 See group i below. Counter-, eontra-, contra-, are ex- 
 pressed by a disjoined tick written generally in the direction 
 of c/i ; but before some strokes it is written in the direction 
 of /. See group 2. Write the disjoined prefix first. 
 
 Exercise XCII. 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 I...- .!^^a ..,.!X;_^ X^. -^ ^^^ "^r»^ -^ 
 
 />} L ^^.. ,^ X^ ^ ,^^-^ 1 L, 
 
 '^J ^ 
 
 Exercise XCIII. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Entertain, entertaining, enterprisingly, interdict, interview, inter- 
 sperse, intercede, interloper, intermission, introduce, introduction. 
 
 2. Counteract, counterfeit, counterpane, countershaft, counterweight, 
 countersign, countermine, counter-attraction, contravene, contradistinction, 
 contradictory, controversy. 
 
 235. Logograms.— — good, ^ after, ^ fact, read, 
 
 ^ word, r hold, held, .2... immediate-ly, ^ nature, ^ under, 
 hand. 164
 
 The Halving Principle. 
 
 165 
 
 236. Contractions. — anybody, ^:^^;^. nobody, 
 
 \,^^ everybody, ) establish-ed-ment, J intelligence, 
 
 y intelligible, _>w bankrupt, O merchandise, 1/ territory, 
 
 practicable. 
 
 237. Special Forms. — 1 ° likewise, y — article, 
 heretofore, Z^. indeed, _^ intend, ( little. 
 
 October, 
 
 A/ return, f handle, )/ | yesterday, 
 V-^ wisdom, "■^ individual. 
 
 238. Phrase. — -.-^ — . - net-cash. 
 
 239. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise XCIV. 
 
 32 - 
 
 ^ . L \_ , \ , ^^^y/" __^ 1 - 
 ^^^ ^_' "^ ^ \ 
 
 - ^^ J ^^-t 
 
 „>, i./]. 
 
 ./. 
 
 r 
 
 ..!^^ ."=L 
 
 — 1 ~ 
 
 .L, i I
 
 1 66 TJie FJwnograpkic Anianuoisis. 
 
 V ■ i. -^ t L^ r- V .„_ , /.,„, 
 
 ^ < S:; ^ ' ^ ^ ^ X ^ - 
 
 V I „ t ^ '« ^ ^ ^ 
 
 l 
 
 - ^ - K t: r 
 
 Ic '^ :^ L^ , _ /c...._ 1 
 
 ..r:. ,2" iz: ^. L_,. .Lr, 
 
 !i r2, ,!\, /2N..X f .1 
 
 w 
 
 ....V. 
 
 ^ k 
 
 33 
 
 I.. 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 .^.. 
 
 \- 
 
 ^x 
 
 =. i^..... ^ I ^... 
 
 — =,x ^ ^ 
 
 L ::^.:i v^v 
 
 ^ ^ ^ - ' -^ / 
 
 .^ J. ::! i^..i Lo ^ : 1 °^ «. 
 
 k k,^ :^^ -^ ' =..,. ^- ^^J 
 
 3: 
 
 I. \^ 1 
 
 jT 
 
 t^v- 
 
 (j ,:,
 
 The Halving Frinciple. 
 
 167 
 
 .C:^^ 
 
 %^ ^ 
 
 t: 
 
 c_^=z: d, ..a 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 U^ 
 
 -t- 
 
 ^i^ 
 
 :^ ^ i ^■■■■■■■ 
 
 V 
 
 C..^,W2..^.../t-.. r- L, w-^.._ 
 
 .,.^_^ I^ C ^ " ^ 
 
 c! as. 
 
 •34 " 
 
 _..._-i>l \^ L_^ IZJ.. 
 
 :^ 5 ^ z 1 A „ 
 
 \ 
 
 1 
 
 '=\ 
 
 'X- ^^^rrrntr.. b- 
 
 .M.. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ) c21 , 
 
 L| \ / 
 
 nz ^^ y 
 
 ) J o : n : ^, 
 
 -X 
 
 •4- 
 
 c 
 
 ..._a.._..\^ ~ 1 ^. Q^..
 
 1 68 The PhonograpJiic Amamicnsis. 
 
 32. 
 
 Mr. Anthony J. Benedict, Train Master, 
 
 Indianapolis, Ind. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 I met Mr. Boyd yesterday and asked him to have placed in each of 
 our baggage-cars, at the earliest practicable day, a file-hook, on which 
 I intend to have the men in charge of trains place a note at the end of 
 each trip, covering any little repairs which may be necessary to the 
 cars of the train, such as broken locks, bad wheels, leaking air-pipes 
 or gas-pipes, broken window-glass, and, indeed, all items of such a na- 
 ture as may need the attention of this office and which the car-repair- 
 ers ought to know of immediately after the arrival of the train. 
 
 Please instruct the conductors in your territory to make out such 
 a note in intelligible form and hang it on the hook so as to secure 
 proper attention to any defect of this nature at the right time. This, 
 of course, is to be in addition to any individual reports you may desire 
 to have made to your office as heretofore on the regular form. I think 
 you will realize the wisdom of this regulation and the good which will 
 come of it, and I shall be obliged to you if you will hold your men 
 strictly to these instructions until the new practise becomes well es- 
 tablished, when, I am sure, everybody will be well satisfied with it. 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 Messrs. Dodd & Company, 
 
 Columbus, Ohio. 
 Dear Sirs: 
 
 We are in receipt of your favor of October 12, which we read with 
 much satisfaction. We are pleased to know you are again ready to buy 
 some sheet-metal. Respecting the metal you now desire to buy, we would 
 say we believe we can supply you with as satisfactory an article as any- 
 body can. We base this belief on the fact of our furnishing some of 
 your competitors with large supplies of this class of metal, and we 
 think we have never failed to give satisfaction. Indeed, we might say 
 we have always held the trade when once we have been able fairly to es- 
 tablish intercourse with the consumer. We are sure a little intelli- 
 gence and patience on both sides will enable us to produce a sheet which 
 will answer your purpose in every respect, as the resources of our es- 
 tablishment are such as to enable us to handle all varieties of sheet- 
 metal . 
 
 We therefore ask you to oblige us by shippinc by express, at our 
 expense, a few samples (ten or twenty will be enough) of the sheet you 
 are now using. In the meantime, wo will undertake to prepare some 
 samples which in our opinion will suit you, so we may have them in hand 
 at the time your samples reach us. We will then compare the two sets of 
 samples, and will make any changes in ours which may be thought neces- 
 sary, after which we will return your samples and likewise let you have
 
 The Halving Principle. 169 
 
 the samples of the sheets we propose to furnish you. We will at the 
 same time make you a very low net cash price on a lot of any size you 
 may wish to buy. 
 
 Hoping to receive an immediate answer giving us word you have 
 shipped the samples, we remain 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 34 
 
 Gerald Barnard, Esq., 
 
 Scranton, Pa. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Yours of October 8 to Mr. H. D, Judd , inclosing the claim of Pick- 
 ett Brothers, has been handed to me by Mr. Judd. 
 
 There can be no controversy over the justness of this claim, and in 
 fact Mr. Judd never did deny it, but the truth is Mr. Judd is now bank- 
 rupt, having filed a petition in insolvency several months ago, and it 
 will therefore not avail you to bring suit upon the claim. The failure 
 was total, as his stock of merchandise was worth but a small sum, and 
 his liabilities ran up to thousands of dollars. Of course, nobody can 
 hope to make a claim against him under these circumstances. I am sorry 
 to have to make this report, but the fact is as I have given it to you. 
 Yours respectfully.
 
 Lesson XLVII. — Halved Strokes with 
 Circles and Loops. 
 
 240. Circles. — A circle following a halved stroke is read 
 last. See group i. A circle preceding a halved stroke is 
 read first. See group 2. 
 
 241. Loops. — A loop following a halved stroke is read 
 
 last. I'he word midst is the only word in modern English 
 
 strictly Avritten according to this i^rinciple. The loop follow- 
 ing half-lengths is therefore allowed to represent the syllable 
 -est in forming superlatives. See group 3. A loop preceding 
 a halved stroke is read first. See group 4. 
 
 Exercise XCV. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 I._ :....-..^..-. _D ->i :. '}ia % ^ ^_p h, X40- -..,1^. 
 
 ..Jy^. _^ L X ^ L -^ \^ 
 
 ^ ^- — ^ h — "^ 
 
 ?: !: :i >. J. ^ 1 ^, Y. :> V 4- 
 
 .=& ^ <^'" W 1 11, I, V I ^ 
 
 ...W -^ <i^ C-- •- ^Xl. -^- 
 
 ^ V 4 ^ 
 
 170
 
 Halved Strokes luitJi Circles and Loops. 1 7 1 
 
 3 " r ^ ^ >^-" ^■- 
 
 I 
 
 4 . - ?^ X ..^ - ;...- <^.- 3^... 
 
 Exercise XCVI. 
 
 To be written in plionography. 
 
 1. Pits, cats, fights, lights, shouts, units, lads, cuts, hearts, leads, 
 modes, pats, pickets, bullets, comets, directs, enumerates, omelets, 
 pheasants, prophets, resorts, pockets, lofts, carpets, pennants, unfolds. 
 
 2. Spite, sect, slate, smut, spot, ceased, sonnet, switched, seized, sleet, 
 soured, sent, seethed, swords, summits, insert, swiftly, softly, phosphate, 
 lacerate, besieged, desert, resound, absent, accent, desired, disavowed, dis- 
 owned, disunite, excelled, exult, fastened, gasped, insect, misdeed, obso- 
 lete, puzzled, received, resumed, rosebud, unsold, wainscot, descends, 
 exacts. 
 
 3. Fattest, hardest, tightest, cutest, fittest, maddest, slightest. 
 
 4. Stopped, stitched, stuffed, stilt, steeped, start, staved, stared, stepped, 
 steeled, stilled, stooped, styled.
 
 Lesson XLVIII. — The Halving Principle. 
 — Sentence-writing — II. 
 
 242. Logogram. 
 
 somewhat. 
 
 >^v 
 
 243. Contractions. — <^si_^-^ indiscriminate, ^\^ indis- 
 pensable, I interest, \^— -, September, 6^^~b sometimes. 
 
 244. Phrases. — is-not, has-not, r° let-us, x/-"^ per- 
 cent, \/ St. -Paul, 7 St. Joseph, ^ St. -Louis, 
 
 ^— -^ some-time. 
 
 245. Special Form. — ^ 
 
 246. Business Letters. 
 
 certain. 
 
 Exercise XCVII.
 
 The Halving Principle. 
 
 X ^...^.. v^ Iv^ k.! C f.. 
 
 1 / ^ ' %. V ~ 
 
 •u 6 €^ - — ^ :>£\^..^ V^ ^ x;- 
 
 17: 
 
 ^ 25 QP 
 
 L r.,A. 
 
 x_ =7 c^ : 1 
 
 36 
 
 .4-...-: :5,.:.^..v. -^ :i ..x^^x l 
 
 .(^ ^.^^ r:^ 2 LJ ,<j _!-\^ W.,.,_,.^^l^_...z: 
 
 .( ^i L L - .....-_ t ri c-i 
 
 "^ -^A z \., 
 
 NT. -...-. f?..- tu 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■F^-^^-- 
 
 •^ 30 i 
 
 30 fc. - -tf:^- 
 
 f 
 
 v^ t 
 
 .3.7. 
 
 ^■ 
 
 - - b CL,. 
 
 ^ rx I :^ 4........ 
 
 .^ ^: :> ^ 
 
 v^^ ^■- 
 
 t ^"^ h<- 
 
 1.. 
 
 _ ._^ / 
 
 -.-:^ ^OK- C^ 
 
 r 
 
 Q_p 
 
 <z:. 
 
 -V
 
 174 The Phonograpliic Amanuensis. 
 
 J V« 
 
 ^ ~l^ „:' /: L ^ J 
 
 » Lrrrj) ^ Ss_^ c — ^rrTTj. 6/^...>s__;;^^ ^ dr>>^. l.^. 
 
 ' ..X r:^.. ^.^ ^ ^ -^ 
 
 r~L 
 
 35- 
 
 Ur. Vincent C. Stewart, 
 
 St. Louis, Mo. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Referring to your favor of September 25, we would say there is 
 really very little for ua in this business at the price at which you 
 have sold this iron, and we are therefore not able to allow you much of 
 a commission on it. We appreciate your interest in obtaining the busi- 
 ness, and we think it likely it will be a forerunner of a somewhat ex- 
 tensive trade with the Central Missouri Company, from which it is 
 reasonably certain you will hereafter derive a good deal of benefit and 
 profit. However, we can hardly expect you to secure business for us 
 "for fun," and wo will allow you a commission of twenty-five cents a 
 ton, which is really more than we can properly afford to give. This, in 
 addition to 255 for cash, will, we trust, be satisfactory. 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 Jasper H. Sands, Esq., 
 
 St. Paul, Minn. 
 My dear Sir : 
 
 We are in receipt of yours of September 24, with offer of business 
 from Swift & Company. We will hold this until we have a reply from 
 them, either direct or through you, in reference to terras. We must de- 
 cline to allow them sixty days' time. As you know, they have been very 
 slow in settling their recent bills, and by way of excuse they say they
 
 The Halving Principle. 175 
 
 have some money tied up in the internal revenue office the receipt of 
 which has been expected by them for some time, but which has not yet 
 been received. As stated to you in our last, this has not seemed to us 
 a sufficient excuse for allowing our bills to run three or four months. 
 Our terms are thirty days, and we must ask them to agree to them before 
 we can accept the business. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 37- 
 
 Mr. David A. Prescott, 
 
 St. Joseph, Mo. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 We inclose you a communication just received from T. W. Chesnutt & 
 Company, which please read and return to us. We will take the responsi- 
 bility of accepting their note and of waiving interest on the same. I 
 will send you money as soon as we receive it, and I trust it will be 
 satisfactory to you. It seems to be a large claim for them to make, and 
 of course we have no means of knowing the truth of their assertions. We 
 are aware indiscriminate claims are sometimes made in such cases, but on 
 the whole it is not often done, and as many agents and customers of ours 
 have made similar claims, we are forced to believe there is something in 
 it. If we are to hold our trade with the best dealers we must make cer- 
 tain concessions in cases like this. 
 
 We have just heard from Mr. Santley, inclosing a note for Mr. Phil- 
 lips, which you will have to send him so he can act for you, Mr. Morris 
 says he does not know what will be done. Mr. Smith will take charge on 
 your behalf, but it is indispensable he should first receive the papers 
 from you. Please let us hear from you as soon as possible. 
 Yours truly,
 
 Lesson XLIX. — Halved Strokes with 
 Final Hooks. 
 
 247. Final-hook Strokes. — A final-hook stroke may be 
 halved to add / (see group i) or d (see group 2). 
 
 248. T and d Distinguished. — If it is desired to indi- 
 cate clearly that d and not / is added l)y halving, the hook 
 may be shaded. See group 3. In practise this is seldom 
 necessary, as the context almost always determines which 
 should be read. It is necessary, however, to retain the shaded 
 hooks in writing proper names and in the words given in 
 group 4. It will be noted that when ( n ,-— ._,. are halved 
 it is the hook which is .shaded to add d, and not the stroke, as 
 in the case of simple strokes. Compare paragraph 229. 
 
 249. W, Y, Mp, Ng Halved. — Although the .strokes zv, 
 y, Dip, ;/{,'• cannot be halved wlien sim])le (see paragraph 229), 
 they may be halved if a final hook l)e attached. See group 5. 
 
 Exercise XCVIII. 
 
 To he re.id and copied. 
 
 I. 
 
 ...^ ^ ^L..^ l_. \ ^\^ k- -.^. ^ Zl,_ 
 
 ..k 
 
 .^. <:..... 
 
 A V-' 
 
 >^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ .■ ^ ,. , ^ 
 
 OJ 
 
 2 
 
 t.. 
 
 Co 
 
 ...^... 
 
 '" ■/• -^ ^ ^ *^ f* l^- Vv-J- 
 
 176
 
 ...~:::^^. 
 
 ■ir ^. |> V? \^ >J^, 
 
 Halved Strokes zvitJi Final Hooks. 177 
 
 ^.. % ^ ^- .^ ^ ^::^.. 
 
 I 
 
 .L3.. 
 
 ..^....o<,.,..(^ ^ Vj . •^ A: J: \c?:2....\>r? -^.....^ ,D:... J): ^ >o:.,. 
 
 :r:^ :is ^ - 
 
 A A 
 
 5 ^ ^ b ^ — 
 
 ^ ■ A 
 
 Exercise XCIX. 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Haunt, lint, ardent, invent, re-appoint, occupant, element, event, 
 latent, ailment, appoint, assailant, chant, dent, gaunt, hunt, identify, jaunt, 
 lenient, payment, recount, silent, stint, taunt, violent, haunts, counts, in- 
 vents, re-appoints, occupants, elements, events, tyrants, puffed, cuffed, ritt, 
 chafed, handcuffed, bereft, dwarfed, roofed, rafts, rifts. 
 
 2. Diamond, opened, amend, bond, bandage, vender, candor, niiiul, 
 around, rejoined, appendage, obtained, Ireland, abound, attained, chained, 
 demand, errand, happened, horned, inland, legend, moaned, thinned, re- 
 mind, Poland, diamonds, fiends, amends, rounds, seconds, paved, caved, 
 hived, raved, served, beliooved, roved, upheaved, stationed, motioned, 
 auctioned, cushioned. 
 
 3. Paint, pained; faint, feigned; pint, pined; scant, scanned; fount, 
 found ; unbent, unbend ; errant, errand ; rent, rend ; spent, spend. 
 
 4. Reverent, reverend ; mount, mound ; pent, penned. 
 
 5. Yawned, impugned, impend, impassioned, ambient, impound, damp- 
 ened, championed, campaigned.
 
 Lesson L. — The Halving Principle. — 
 Sentence-writing — 1 1 1. 
 
 250. Logograms. — ...^- behind, J gentleman, gentle- 
 men, __, account, cannot, ^.amount. 
 
 251. Contractions. — ^^ independent-ce, V intelligent, 
 . . notwithstanding, ^-T England. 
 
 252. Phrases. — . at-hand, . . did-not, J do-not, 
 
 J 
 
 . had-not, Vd have-not, /^ will-not, /^ are-not, ^ may-not, 
 J 
 
 . I -am -not. 
 
 253. Special Forms. — ^~/ instant, — ,_^ mentioned, 
 
 iT"^ Maryland. Words like _.. assig/nncn/, X disappoiiit- 
 i/u'/it, are written with the syllable -. -meiit disjoined. 
 
 254. Business Letters. — Capitalization. — It is some- 
 times convenient, in note-taking, to ciistinguish a proper from 
 a common noun. For this purjjose it is only necessary to 
 write two short ticks ( = ) under the outline to indicate that it 
 is a proper noun and should be capitalized when transcribed. 
 
 Exercise C. 
 
 - -- 38 
 
 ...0. C ^r.^ >V^ ^-^^,^..ZX ^."^ ^.... ,\^^ ^ k, 
 
 178
 
 The Halving Principle. 
 
 179 
 
 A.. 
 
 k / .^ 1 ZL^ I ^ 
 
 L^ ^ ^......::\^.. I^ ::-rrx 
 
 ..\.... 
 
 ■ y^ I 
 
 £... 
 
 K 
 
 a 
 
 .n 
 
 1 1 4 1 Z 
 
 ...r. L ..^x :^ .^ r^ ^ /--. 
 
 ^ ^ 7- ^ '^ ^ V 
 
 c... !l i^ L y k^ y^::^^. X 
 
 -/ 
 
 (... H \a .J>p Xrrr^ K. J O * J .>>,_,,;;;_^... 
 
 ^ k— \^ ^X ^ ^ ^■- ' -4^ %;^ \^ 
 
 -■^ (>::;>- -V -^ •• Uii- *^-_P V^ ^ ^ 
 
 ' /^ ^ --x \ -^ 
 
 .r^r- 
 
 f— 
 
 39 
 
 ^ 
 
 ..„..._ Z: \ rL.. ^^ t^....zrr:.. ^ 
 
 I "rw^ cr:.... ..- I.. z.^ n....-^. 
 
 r.... Ci:\ k^.. ^ F : z:^ X. ^x .^^ 
 
 ..:::::i ^^CII-. \- Z^^ Xx- 
 
 i^:::::g 
 
 c... 
 
 ..>^2s^ -... 
 
 /I 
 
 ...!::\..
 
 i8o The Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 
 - ^- X a ->>^ 
 
 \ 
 
 f > 
 
 ^ °^- I ^ ^ ^ " \ t . , 
 
 H ^ ^ V^ ----' '^ 
 
 ■ \ ^_'-^/^? l~-X^. 
 
 \-^^ S' 
 
 40 
 
 ^^ 1^„ , N^. £ _x -'^-^ ^ ^6 
 
 ^ fx...-^ \-'> ^ ) Z ^ "^ ^-^ 
 
 I K. ^ ^ ^ ?_ ^^^Jo Z° :^ ^ 
 
 L ^ "^ t: ^ 1 : I^ ^ I' IJ L 
 
 ^ \ ^x l^l . ^ ^ * L., 
 
 r 
 
 ^^V 
 
 ' ^^ - J 3 ^ ^ 1 
 
 n 
 
 L/:^^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ i- ^ i, ^ '' r ^ -^ ^ 1 
 
 ' - ^ ^ox >-\^ y y ~=" ■^— 
 
 i (:'S^ -r^.^.-
 
 TJie Halving Principle. i8i 
 
 38. 
 
 Mr. 0. L. Maitland, 
 
 Baltimore, Ud . 
 My dear Sir: 
 
 Arrangements are being made for the trial of your case against Ed- 
 mund J. Oliphant, at Cleveland, at two o'clock next Monday, September 2, 
 Mr. Oliphant having recently returned from England. You must be on hand 
 and have with you your written assignment, and the book of your accounts 
 with Mr. Hunt. I desire the presence of Mr. Hunt also. If you have any 
 way of giving him notice, please do so, and I will make an independent 
 attempt to reach him. I have not met him in this city within the last 
 three or four days, and I am not certain he is here now. I will keep 
 him in mind, however, and should I see him, I will not fail to secure 
 his attendance at the trial. 
 
 After giving the whole question thoughtful consideration, I feel 
 confident we are pursuing the best course. Of course, Mr. Oliphant will 
 dislike this proceeding very much, but the gentleman has a way of saving 
 himself, and it is for him to find the remedy. I do not think there is 
 any chance of the result of the trial proving a disappointmertt to you, 
 frovided only you have safe and strong evidence showing the amount of 
 ."Our account against Mr. Hunt to be at least as much as Mr. Hunt's earn- 
 ings were due and payable from Mr. Oliphant. 
 Yours truly, 
 
 39- 
 
 Messrs. Ryland & Pond, 
 
 Cleveland, Ohio. 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 We are in need of a salesman in the city of Cleveland who is will- 
 ing to handle our goods as a side line. We are pushing our goods in 
 your locality just now, but are not satisfied with our present arrange- 
 ments. We must have a wide-awake man of considerable judgment and inde- 
 pendence of character to look after our interests. We will stand firmly 
 behind the right man, and he will have a good thing right from the 
 start. We intend to advertise in the daily papers of your city in the 
 hope of securing such a man, but with our present knowledge we cannot 
 make an intelligent choice. As we have often seen your advertisement in 
 the Cleveland papers, we thought you might be able to tell us the papers 
 best suited to the purpose. We have had the Leader and the Plain Dealer 
 mentioned to us. Do you think these two papers would give the best and 
 quickest returns? 
 
 We thank you in advance for the courtesy of a reply, and hope we 
 may some time be able to reciprocate the favor. 
 Very truly yours,
 
 1 82 The Phonographic Auiamtcnsis. 
 
 40. 
 
 Rutland Construction Company, 
 
 Louisville, Ky. 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 Your favor of the 16th inst. is at hand. We are sorry to be com- 
 pelled to say we shall not be able to comply with your request to change 
 the date of delivery of the steel from July 1 to September 1. This is 
 because our labor contracts all expire on July 1, and at this time we, 
 of course, have not the means of telling just what demands may or may 
 not bo made upon us next year, Therefore, we shall have to ask you to 
 allow the contract to stand as made--for delivery prior to July 1. Wo 
 would not insist on your taking out all the steel prior to July 1 in 
 case you found you did not need it, unless we felt there were some pros- 
 pect of a change in the scale. In other words, we would have been will-- 
 ing to allow a portion of the delivery to extend over, notwithstanding 
 the contract reads otherwise, if the conditions had not been such as to 
 prevent us from doing so with no loss to ourselves. However, we wish to 
 assure you you may rely upon our acting as leniently as circumstances 
 will permit. 
 
 Very respectfully,
 
 Lesson LI. — Halved Strokes with Initial 
 Hooks. 
 
 255. Halved Double and Triple Consonants. — The 
 
 /- and r-hook strokes are halved like simple strokes, that is to 
 say, / is added to light strokes (see group i ) and d to heavy 
 strokes (see group 2). A light double consonant may be 
 halved to add d in order to form a past tense. See group 3. 
 
 256. Large W-hook Strokes. — The large 7£'-hook 
 strokes are also regularly halved, / being added to light and d 
 to heavy strokes. See group 4. 
 
 257. Small W-hook Strokes. — I'he small zc-hook 
 strokes are halved to add either / (see group 5) or </ (see 
 group 6). The context can be depended upon to make clear 
 which is intended. When d is added the stroke is not shaded. 
 
 Exercise CI. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 1 5^i y.. A l!! ^•■■ 
 
 •■(i^ •■ ' ^■■ 
 
 2 1 
 
 ^ < vf ^ 1v 
 
 i r ^^ /I .=.: \ J SU:, 
 
 =0 ZX -^ 5^ -^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^: ^ L ^ "^ !! n z \^ ^ ^ 
 
 X ^...^ >^ \ L I ^ ^....:^ ^ " 
 
 183
 
 184 77/6^ Phonographic Ainauucnsis. 
 
 Exercise CII. 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Plate, freight, flute, clot, effort, crate, flight, float, fruit, plight, 
 throat, trot, trout, couplet, entreat, split, street, secret, sprout. 
 
 2. Bleed, agreed, blade, dread, glad, abroad, braid, upbraid, breadth, 
 bubbled, wavered, nibbled, beveled, enabled, feathered, haggard, hovered, 
 sabered, simmered. 
 
 3. Pray, prayed ; try, tried ; crow, crowed ; fry, fried ; plow, plowed ; 
 flow, flowed ; baflile, bafiled ; patter, pattered ; taper, tapered ; recur, re- 
 curred ; display, displayed ; apply, applied ; chatter, chattered ; bottle, 
 bottled ; employ, employed ; reply, replied ; paper, papered. 
 
 4. Quote, quite, acquit, requite, aliquot, languid, adequateness. 
 
 5. Wilt, wart, went, wallet, thwart, wanting. 
 
 6. Wild, wind, wound, walled, weird, waned, swelled, welt, wheeled, 
 swooned, backward, reward, windpipe, rearward, homeward.
 
 Lesson LII. — The Halving Principle. — 
 Sentence-writing — IV. 
 
 258. Logograms.- 
 
 particular-ly, X part, oppor- 
 
 tunity, .^spirit, called, ,__ cared, .^ creature. 
 
 259. Phrases. — "^ in-order (to), in-regard (to), 
 
 with-regard (to), free-on-board ( f . o. b. ) 
 
 260. Special P"orms. — ^—1 hundred, 
 
 261. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise CIII. 
 
 politic. 
 
 — ^ .^.........^, Zx,^.^ x^^ .X->--^x ck^-.-^ \. 
 
 .X_ .^^. ^ : ^ =^ ::^ ^ 1 i,... 
 
 zrzz: f^ s. V ^cs.. I li m \^...z. :^ c 
 
 t^ 24 ^ ^ =z^ z_...^ 2^.. l^..]^ 
 
 ~' '^ ^ "^ — ^- "^ b ^ ^ 1 \ ' :^ ^•■ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^...^ ^. i ^ 
 
 ^^ p-- - - 
 
 I8S
 
 1 86 The PhoiLograpJiic Anianucnsis. 
 
 42 
 
 ^ 
 
 i:'^^ ^u _ t, U . 1^- - ^ 
 
 "^^^ 
 
 a 
 
 vjz'^ .y^ r. 
 
 26 -^x.- 
 
 >^ 
 
 V^ ' ^ N^...._-a 4 .y^D ^ ^...... 
 
 ^ ~f L — ^ -^ X- 
 
 ..X>^-^ / o 1 
 
 .. S»JD N,/U <^-^ 
 
 1 
 
 ;^ » '" < ^ ^ ^ 
 
 f - — 
 
 43 
 
 - C X h:, N^ ^. 3^ 
 
 rx. ^.. ^ " -^^ 
 
 \ 
 
 n. :^ X S^:. r 
 
 ^ --- AI...^ L N^' <^ ^ ^ 5Q Xrr:^ I ... 
 
 ^ ") 55 X^ "^ 50 ..5 X-^ X -J 6a...\^ 
 
 <^ J S5 - ^...XX: ^ sa.... S...X/: ^ _L^
 
 The Halving Principle. 
 
 60 1 . . , \^ S^ =? ^x 
 
 187 
 
 : v^ ;^.. 
 
 r^. ;.^ ^ /. ' zrx_ ^ -d \ Xi _ 
 
 ^ -- " '^ ^ \ I ^ — ^ \:\-^ 
 
 ^ Vp i^y ^ c\ C 
 
 X 
 
 44 
 
 \ / 
 
 .^_^ 
 
 f c. L....:..: c. -^^x- ^^■.■■. 
 
 3 <^ ^ V. % 
 
 c L.....: c. 
 
 '\^ -^ f ^5^ 
 
 f 
 
 ^ ^ t 
 
 3 ^ ^ ^ "^ \ 
 
 -^ . "x v^ .-I ^ ^ ^ a. s -^A^ 
 
 ^■■. : u^ ::x_ 3 ^ L o.^^^^ 
 
 J, r: L_ ^>^ v^ ^ ^ — L ^ 
 
 (^. 
 
 K 
 
 \ ^ ^ ' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ f J L 
 
 \ 
 
 f 
 
 "K
 
 1 88 The Phonographic Amanuensis. 
 
 Ur . J. M. Pratt, Superintendent, 
 
 Pittsburg, Pa. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 At the present time we are very much crowded with empty cars in 
 several of our yards at Detroit. Cannot you make a particular effort to 
 help us out of this? I notice we have on hand, awaiting your instruc- 
 tions, twenty-four of your empty cars, which we received the early part 
 of this week, and if you will give instructions to your people to accept 
 them from us at the first opportunity, at Detroit or any other conven- 
 ient point, your obliging spirit will be particularly appreciated. We 
 shall esteem an early answer an especial favor. 
 Yours truly, 
 
 42. 
 
 Ur. Charles H. Piatt, General Claim Agent, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 I return herev/ith all papers in regard to the claim xf A. F. Breed, 
 as requested in your favor of the 26th inst. When I went to Portsmouth 
 last week I personally called on the claimant, and talked with him with 
 regard to his claim, requesting him to reduce the amount, for the reason 
 stated in your previous communication, but this he refuses to do, and he 
 insists the amount in question does not cover his actual loss. 
 
 If satisfactory to you, I would recommend the payment of the claim 
 which, as it now stands, I consider a reasonable one. The claimant is 
 one of our best patrons, sends all his shipments by way of this road, 
 and it would not be quite politic for us to resist the claim. 
 Yours truly. 
 
 43- 
 
 Kr. L. P. Deland, 
 
 Providence, R. I. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 We understand you are buying frequent small lots of goods, and at 
 this time of the year are compelled more than ever to have them shipped 
 to you promptly and in good shape. You also wish to have the best class 
 of goods obtainable at prices which will enable you to compete for the 
 trade. With these points in view, we quote you the following discounts 
 from our September price-list: Doors Nos. 1 and 2, f>Q%\ doors No. 3,
 
 The Halving Principle. 189 
 
 5556; blinds, 50 and 595; open saeh, tO%\ glazed sash, 55 and i%\ mold- 
 ings, 50 and 5?5, f. o. b. Oakland, sixty days, and Z% for cash in ten 
 days. These prices are for clean, high-grade stock, packed with care 
 and shipped promptly. 
 
 Our large factory facilities, combined with our ample storage-room 
 and new warehouse, at this point enable us to offer these advantages. 
 We manufacture all our goods, guarantee their quality, and know we can 
 give you the best satisfaction to be had in this market. 
 
 Hoping to be favored with your business, which you may rest assured 
 will be well cared for by us, we are 
 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 44. 
 
 B. J. Spratt , Esq . , 
 
 Bridgeport, Conn. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 I am in receipt of your favor of the 2d inst. in regard to the pur- 
 chase of a family horse. I am glad to be able to say we have an animal 
 on hand at this time which I am satisfied will fully meet your require- 
 ments. The animal to which I refer is a seven-year-old bright bay mare, 
 standing 15 3/4 hands high, and of fine appearance and movement. I have 
 known the mare of my own personal knowledge during the last two years, 
 while in the hands of her late owner, and I know her to be a perfectly- 
 broken and very gentle creature. I have seen her a hundred times driven 
 by ladies to and from the railroad station, in the immediate vicinity of 
 moving trains, and her conduct has always been everything which can be 
 desired in a safe, reliable family horse. I give you these particulars 
 in order to let you know how confident I am in recommending this horse; 
 but while she has these desirable traits, she must not be thought to be 
 lacking in style or spirit. 
 
 The price of the mare is $350.00 cash, and we are perfectly willing 
 to send her to you on one week's trial. We think you have here an op- 
 portunity to obtain an animal which will be particularly satisfactory to 
 you. 
 
 Hoping to hear from you by return mail, I am 
 Yours respectfully,
 
 Lesson LIIL— Free Use of the Halving 
 Principle. — Past Tenses. 
 
 262. Long Outlines. — In writing outlines of consider- 
 able length, the halving principle may be employed freely to 
 add either / or d, irrespective of the shade of the halved 
 stroke. See groui) i. 
 
 263. Short Outlines.— In writing brief outlines, how- 
 ever, (those, namely, in which the halved stroke is the only 
 stroke, and those which contain only one simple stroke in 
 addition to the halved stroke) the rules given in the three 
 immediately-foregoing lessons should in general be strictly 
 applied. The only exceptions are in the cases of certain 
 words of frequent recurrence, which, as experience has 
 shown, may be safely written with the free use of the halving 
 principle. These outlines should, however, be looked upon 
 as special forms and carefully memorized. See group 2. 
 
 264. Rules for Writing Past Tenses.—^?. When 
 the present tense ends with a full-length stroke (simple or 
 compound) halve that stroke to form the past tense. See 
 group 3. 
 
 /;. When a final full-length stroke in the present tense 
 forms no angle with its preceding stroke, the halving prin- 
 ciple cannot, in general, be used, and the stroke-/ or -d must 
 be added. See group 4. 
 
 c. But when such final full-length stroke, making no angle 
 with its preceding stroke, is /, the stroke should be halved 
 and disjoined to form the past tense. See group 5. 
 
 190
 
 Free Use of the Halving Principle. 1 9 1 
 
 d. When the present tense ends with a vowel preceded by 
 a full-length light simple stioke, the halving principle cannot 
 be used, and the stroke-^/ should be added to form the i)ast 
 tense. See group 6. 
 
 e. When the present tense ends with a half-length stroke, 
 add the stroke-^/ to form the past tense. See group 7. 
 
 /. But if such stroke-^/ form no angle with the preceding 
 half-length stroke, it must be disjoined. See group 8. 
 
 g. When the present tense ends with a loop-j-/, write the 
 past tense as shown in group g. 
 
 Exercise CIV. 
 
 To be read and copied. 
 
 I >^ 
 
 CL 3 ., 
 
 Ld. a....^ .O:. ^ (S^X^^.4fl 
 
 ^ -^ \ ^^ ■ 
 
 ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ :^ -^ \^J 
 
 ^ I ^.,J^ ^ ^ I, ^ I ^ 
 
 ^^\u^ ^zx- "X ...^ <^^ ^^ ^ 
 
 z..d... -^ ...p^ ^ ^,„ ^ O^ i^. & ^ 
 
 V b \\ "^ % -^-^ 
 
 \J.... v^ ^ L 1_ L -ex ■C<.... 
 
 ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 4 
 
 r^^ A ^ ' \ ^ -^ ^ ^
 
 192 The PJionogi^aphic ylinauncnsis. 
 
 ^ ,2i q: 'Z>_,.,^1>i j«:„..j£i.._.<^.„=^ 
 
 '■■T? ^ ^ ^^3 ^' ^ (■ ^ ^ h T 
 
 sl'xl^ d '•! ^1 1,1 rDJ :^1 ^:l 
 
 9._..^ ^ X... A. \ \ 14 |;^....L x....J.-..::i :^ 
 
 „ X Np L4. --- 1 -....- 
 
 Exercise CV. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Credit, beautiful, aptitude, multitude, intrepid, private, vertical, 
 anecdote, federal, latitude, prodigious, rectitude, wickedness, aggravate, 
 tribute, energetic, exhibit, inundate, legitimacy, vegetable, verbatim. 
 
 2. Afraid, hatred, cold, doubt, brought, vote, built, seclude, avert, 
 brute, girt, editor, better, budget, beautify, detach, emigrate, generate, 
 gratify, mortal, invert, habit, debate, debit, invite, itinerate, rapid, free- 
 dom, method, wicked, orchard, include, migrate, record. 
 
 3. Reap, reaped; bake, bake4 ; rob, robbed; beg, begged; bathe, 
 bathed ; push, pushed ; betray, betrayed ; moor, moored ; hush, hushed ; 
 pluck, plucked ; tug, tugged ; cage, caged ; argue, argued ; aim, aimed ; 
 air, aired; veil, veiled; assail, assailed; twirl, twirled; hook, hooked; 
 besiege, besieged ; steep, steeped; stock, stocked ; steam, steamed ; hammer, 
 hammered. 
 
 4. Piped, probed, kicked, roared, mapped, leagued, gagged, reared, 
 
 caulked. 
 
 5. Waited, instituted, situated, dotted, whetted, doted, inundated.
 
 Fi^ee Use of the Halving Principle. 193 
 
 6. Pay, paid ; fee, feed ; thaw, thawed ; caw, cawed ; gnaw, gnawed : 
 ally, allied ; annoy, annoyed ; pity, pitied ; renew, renewed ; borrow, 
 borrowed ; rally, rallied. 
 
 7. Acted, sounded, attended, seconded, budded, matted, halted, wanted, 
 wounded, quoted, operated, melted, repeated, mended. 
 
 8. Treated, freighted, yielded, lauded, folded, anointed, agitated, 
 gifted, shielded. 
 
 9. Post, posted ; fast, fasted ; boast, boasted ; dust, dusted ; coast, 
 coasted ; last, lasted ; mist, misted ; paste, pasted ; toast, toasted. 
 
 i3
 
 Lesson LIV. — The Halving Principle. — 
 Sentence-writing — V. 
 
 265. Logograms. — .. doubt, ahout, brought, 
 
 could, got, get, .... that, ( without, T told, 
 
 1 toward, child, accord-ing-ly, ,_ great, o^ world, 
 
 "^ third. 
 
 266. Phrases. — ( so that, ^ I -trust that. 
 
 267. Special Forms. — \_ forget, forgot, ^ indebted, 
 seldom, ~~f interested, ^. understood. 
 
 268. Business Letters. — 
 
 194
 
 The Halving Principle. 
 
 195 
 
 go 
 
 c ns. <!.....- 
 
 46 
 
 / X ~^, v.^ _.. 3^..^ C^ ^...x 
 
 ^ ^.. Z l\ ^ ! V^^^ ^.... k,.x 4 
 
 , x^^ a) N c_^ 
 
 -I "" ^ " ' ^■■ 
 
 ...:!:\..x • ^... 
 
 ^ 
 
 I V 
 
 Z 
 
 H- 
 
 "^ ^ ^ f ^ '^ I ^ \ y'' 
 
 t 1:.^ I ^ ^-...^ .^ }■ ^ ::^^^X 
 
 o /^ "I . o„ , ^^x ^. . .. } ^.x/^ L^ .0. 
 
 \;^ p 
 
 - 47... 
 
 \ 
 
 .( ^ ^. 
 
 I v^ o^, u '^,.. 1:1:^-^ ^ "^- 
 
 -■ ^f ^ b^ ' '^ Xc=,X_ / f N^,. 
 
 /• 
 
 :: ^ ^ 
 
 \^ c::.. 
 
 b^±^ .' J
 
 196 The PhojiograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 45- 
 
 The Atlas Cement Company, 
 
 Philadelphia, Pa. 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 We understand that some Atlas bags were sent by our people from 
 Bridgeport to shippers from whom they got their cement when they could 
 not get Atlas and were in a hurry. It seems they then forgot to keep 
 your sacks separate from the others. These sacks will be sent you from 
 Hartford, and we wish to have a credit memorandum for them as soon as 
 they are received. There will be two lots of them--one has already been 
 shipped containing fifty-three sacks. In the other lot, which will be 
 shipped some time between now and the end of this week, there will be 
 about ninety sacks. 
 
 Yours truly. 
 
 46. 
 
 Mr. J. P. Arnold, 
 
 Evansville, Ind. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Yours of the 3d is received. In regard to the vent-pipes, please 
 refer to page 2 of the specifications near tho top. I had no doubt the 
 point you raise would be readily understood, and accordingly I made no 
 mention of it in our recent conversation. The method to be employed is 
 80 simple a child might understand it, and I am annoyed that there 
 should have been any doubt about proceeding in accord with the plans. 
 If it is not convenient to connect these vent-pipes with the main soil- 
 pipe near the roof-line, they may be brought out directly through the 
 roof. I do not want them to run out through the walls, as that would 
 make an additional turn in the pipes, which is likely to interfere to a 
 certain extent with their operation. Tney should be run so that they 
 iray be ae nearly straight as possible. I trust that you will see that 
 this ie done and the work finished as rapidly as possible. 
 Yours truly,
 
 The Halving Principle. 197 
 
 47- 
 
 Mr. John F. Loveland, ■ 
 
 Des Moines, Iowa. 
 My dear Loveland: 
 
 When I was in Kansas City on the 3d inst. I called at the works of 
 the Edmunds Packing Company, which is said to be the third largest pack- 
 ing plant in the world, and certainly I have seldom seen one with better 
 equipment. While there I met and talked with Mr. Alfred Friedlander, 
 the general superintendent of the works, and according to what he told 
 me they will soon be interested In the purchase of a 300 H. P. compound 
 engine. I shall therefore be greatly indebted to you if you will follow 
 this up and give Mr. Friedlander full information about our engines, 
 quoting him close prices. 
 
 I trust that you will not forget to let me know the outcome of 
 this. 
 
 Faithfully yours.
 
 Lesson LV. — The Doubling Principle. 
 
 269. Added Ter and Der.— Any curved stroke may he 
 doubled in length to indicate the addition of ter (see group 
 i) or dcr (see group 2). 
 
 270. Vocalization of Double-lengths. — A vowel 
 placed before a double-length stroke is read first. A vowel 
 placed after a double-length stroke is read next after the 
 primary stroke and before the added tcr or der. 
 
 271. Position of Double-length Strokes.— To write 
 a double-length stroke in a given position, begin it at pre- 
 cisely the point at which the corresponding single-length 
 stroke in the same position would be begun, and let the added 
 length go on in the direction of writing. 
 
 272. Added Ther. — -Any curved stroke may be doubled 
 in length to indicate the addition of ther. See group 3. 
 
 273. Added Ker, Ger. — AV may be doubled in length 
 to express the addition of ker (see group 4) o\ ger (see group 
 5) as well as to add ter, der, ther. 
 
 274. Added Er. — By doubling, cr may be added to ;/// 
 (see group 6), or ;;//' (see grou]) 7). 
 
 275. Intervocalization of Double-length Strokes. — 
 In any syllable added by doubling, the normal vowel is the 
 second-place light dash. If, however, it is desired to indicate 
 clearly an accented vowel or a distinct long vowel or diph- 
 thong in the syllable added by doubling, it may be done by 
 intervocalization just as is done in the case of double con- 
 sonants. See group 8, and com|)are paragraph 200. But 
 when a double-length doul>Ie eonsouant is intervocalized, the 
 
 198
 
 The Doubling Principle. 
 
 199 
 
 intervocalization takes effect on the double consonant and 
 not on the syllable added by doubling. See group 9. 
 
 276. N-hook Added to Double-length Strokes.— 
 The //-hook may be added to any double length stroke, and 
 it is invariably read after the syllable added by lengthening. 
 See group 10. 
 
 277. Past Tenses. — Past tenses of verbs whose present 
 forms end in double-length strokes are generally written with 
 half-length double consonants (see group 11), but after the 
 double-length //, //>,'•, and sli the past tense is formed liy adding 
 a stroke-^/ to the form of the present (see group 12). 
 
 278. Limits of Position-writing. — An outline which 
 consists of two strokes, one of which is doubled, is regarded 
 as being a Awi,-- outline, so far as position-writing is concerned, 
 and need not be written in position. Compare paragraphs 
 35, III, and 233. 
 
 Exercise CVII. 
 
 To be read and copied.
 
 200 The PJioiiograpJiic Ainanucusis. 
 
 Exercise CVIII. 
 
 To be written in phonography. 
 
 1. Easter, aster, alter, fitter, fighter, sliatter, later, niter, flatter, fritter, 
 slighter, diameter, rafter, filter, water, motor, swelter, winter, deserter, 
 porter, flutter. 
 
 2. Order, harder, wander, invader, teniler, tinder, surrender. 
 
 3. Wither, father, smother, whither. 
 
 4. Sinker, clinker, hanker. 
 
 5. Hunger, stronger, linger, finger, anger. 
 
 6. Temper, jumper, distemper, pamper. 
 
 7. Umber, cumber, timber, clamber. 
 
 8. Entire, future, material, curvature, furniture. 
 
 9. Murder, further, farther. 
 
 10. Modern, eastern, slattern, northern, subaltern. 
 
 11. Watered, faltered, muttered, weathered, scampered, murdered, 
 altered, littered, frittered, filtered, fluttered, hampered, lumbered, timbered, 
 clambered. 
 
 12. Entered, angered, wondered, shuddered, wandered, tendered, sur- 
 rendered, tinkered, hungered.
 
 Lesson LVI. — The Doubling Principle 
 Sentence-writing. 
 
 279. Logograms. — ^ — ^ matter, ^^ 
 
 ^ younger, longer. 
 
 280. Phrases. — J your-letter, 
 
 another-letter, ./Tr last-letter, 
 
 in-our-letter. 
 
 281. Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise CIX. 
 
 -....- 48 
 
 another, 
 
 this-letter, 
 next-letter, 
 
 201
 
 202 The PhonograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 ac 
 
 
 2.QO.. 
 
 L <" J 
 \ 
 
 1 /„ 4.. c _ 
 
 X J- b ^^^ — ^^ 
 
 -:>,- 1 y. V a c. ,.^:„v 
 
 LQ.i 
 
 =^ \- - 
 
 ") "^ 1 f 1 ^ "^ |, I ^ z:~: :v - 
 
 ^^ t_ ^ -l^^\^ ^ ^ ^.■■■ 
 
 -=- J- ' -=- '—' Y ^ J ^ ■f=^- 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 F 
 
 50 
 
 (^ ^ _^ 
 
 J 
 
 a 
 
 K^ 
 
 '^-.^ 
 
 ..^, 
 
 .L ^ \^.:a. 
 
 N^ 
 
 ,.._^.. 
 
 
 ^- o<^ ^-d ..^ 
 
 ^2r^. V^. >e^ ~~lr:^ ) I 
 
 .1 ) ^^ l...rx 1
 
 The Doublmg Principle. 203 
 
 48. 
 
 Mr. Arthur P. Henderson, 
 
 Portland, Maine. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Your letter of June 9, inclosing expense bill for shipment of roof- 
 ing-paper, is at hand. We understand that the freight on this material 
 has not yet been paid, and in order that the matter may not run on any 
 longer we hand you herewith our check for $2.28, and would ask you to 
 forward it to the acent, returning the receipted expense bill to us in 
 your next letter. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 49- 
 
 Mr. David H. Anderson, 
 
 Lynn, Mass. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Since we wrote you our last letter Mr. A. C. Schrader has called 
 on us, desiring to pay a note in the sum of 8200 with interest, which 
 It is believed you hold against him. It seems that you did not leave 
 this note with us, and we do not know whether you hold it or not. Mr. 
 Schrader tells us that he spoke to you personally about this matter dur- 
 ing your recent visit to New Bedford, and that he has seen your father 
 as well as your younger brother regarding it; also that he has made in- 
 quiry at both the banks here, but that neither one produces the note. 
 He therefore gives us notice that interest on said note shall stop this 
 day, and that he is ready and willing to pay the note on presentation. 
 It would seem to us that this renders it advisable for you to look into 
 this matter at once. The matter mentioned in our letter of December 10 
 has been looked into, and we find nothing can be done about it this 
 winter. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 50. 
 
 Mr. Albert H. Kemper, General Counsel, 
 
 Springfield, Mass. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Since I last wrote you I have received another letter from Charles 
 Alter in regard to the Sommerville accident. In this letter Mr. Alter 
 says that he can neither affirm nor deny that the bell of the engine was 
 ringing as the train passed the Third Street crossing, but he certainly 
 retains no recollection of hearing it ring. He is willing, however, to 
 swear that the gateman was at his post and gave the usual signals as the 
 train was approaching, and he further says he can bring another witness 
 to prove this. 
 
 Yours truly,
 
 Lesson LVII. — Clashes and Distinctions. 
 
 282. Clashes. — In paragraphs 33 and 34 it was shown 
 that in sentence-writing vowels may be omitted and the un- 
 vocalized outlines for most words may be read without hesi- 
 tation, and this through the legil)ility afforded by position- 
 writing and context. There remains, however, a class of 
 words which neither position-writing nor context renders 
 legible. It is evident that if a single outline stand for two 
 words, and if the accented vowel in both words occupy the 
 same vowel-place, position-writing will not determine which 
 is which. If, furthermore, both words happen to be of the 
 same part of speech and of such a meaning that either would 
 make sense in a given sentence, it is evident that context 
 does not distinguish them. Such words are said to clash 
 with one another, and their outlines must be distinguished \\\ 
 some definite manner. 
 
 283. Distinction by Vocalization. — The words given 
 in group i of the following exercise form just such clashes. 
 In order that they may be read with certainty it is necessary 
 that the phonograjjher insert the vowel in one or both of the 
 clashing words. If, however, the vowel be habitually inserted 
 in a certain one, while the other is habitually left unvocalized, 
 the distinction is complete. In practise, these words are 
 vocalized as shown in the exercise. 
 
 284. General Rules of Position-writing.— A com- 
 ])arison of ])aragraphs 35, iii, 142, 233, and 278, in the 
 foregoing lessons, will enal:>le the student to understand the 
 following general rules for the use of position-writing : 
 
 204
 
 Clashes and Distinctions. 205 
 
 All primitive words are regularly written in position when 
 their outlines consist of (<?) a single stroke, whether with or 
 without appendages, and whether modified or unmodified by 
 halving or doubling; or (/^) two unmodified strokes without 
 appendages. 
 
 Long outlines, /. e., outlines consisting of two strokes plus 
 something — be it a circle, a hook, a loop, a halving, a doub- 
 ling, another stroke, or any combination of these — are, for 
 primitive words, regularly written on the line, irrespective of 
 the place of the accented vowel ; but outlines of derivative 
 words take the position of their respective primitives. 
 
 285. Long Outlines Specially Distinguished by 
 Position. — Long outlines, it will be remembered (see jjara- 
 graph 35), usually stand for but a single word. In a few 
 cases, however, long outlines stand for two or more clashing 
 words which must be distinguished by writing the outline in 
 position in accordance with the place of the accented vowels 
 of the words. See group 2. In a very few cases such out- 
 lines are, for practical convenience, written irregularly in po- 
 sition, and not in accordance with the place of the accented 
 vowel. See group 3. 
 
 286. Distinction by Variation. — In certain cases the 
 most convenient and practical means of distinction between 
 clashing words lies in variation of the consonantal outlines. 
 The regular form is used for one word, while the conflicting 
 word is written with a form which is more or less arbitrarily 
 varied therefrom. See group 4. 
 
 Exercise CX. 
 
 .4.^..^ ^ ^ ^ '^ -^ - i 5 Y 
 
 ...'Zl....(2 (2
 
 2o6 TJie Phonog7'aphic Amanue7isis. 
 
 •^t''- - 
 
 1_ 
 
 ^^ Xj v^ 
 
 ..^ ^Z 'X. ^^ \ Xx > V 3 k:! 
 
 ^ ^^ ^v^ i^A -^ ^ 
 
 1. God, guide; ship, shop; pity, piety; sun, snow; silly, sly; heat, 
 height; soft, swift; squeal, squall; squeak, squawk; sulphate, sulphite; 
 pemianent, pre-eminent ; russet, roseate, rusty. 
 
 2. Petrify, putrify ; prominent, permanent ; truck, track ; daughter, 
 debtor ; bleak, black ; business, baseness ; division, devotion ; violent, 
 valiant ; notional, national ; score, secure ; destruction, distraction ; de- 
 light, daylight. 
 
 3. Prompt, permit, promote ; permission, promotion. 
 
 4. Poor, pure ; insuperable, inseparable ; prosecute, persecute ; patron, 
 pattern ; proffer, prefer ; present, personate ; support, separate ; aban- 
 doned, abundant ; train, turn ; gentle, genteel ; fierce, furious ; righteous, 
 riotous; Mrs., Misses; Ingenious, ingenuous. 
 
 Exercise CXI. 
 
 To be written in phonograjihy. Repeat each sentence, using the word 
 in parenthesis in the repetition. 
 
 I. A wise and good man will seek the aid of a just God (guide). 
 2. The greater part of this company's capital is invested in their ships 
 (shops). 3. A feeling of pity (piety) filled her bosom. 4. The weather 
 was extreme, and they made slow progress on account of the sun (snow). 
 5. A silly (sly) look came over her countenance as she narrated the in- 
 cident. 6. At this season of the year the heat (height) of the sun in- 
 creases perceptibly from week to week. 7. His remark brought a soft
 
 Clashes and Distinctions. 207 
 
 (swift) answer from her usually silent lips. 8. A loud squeal (squall) 
 greeted their ears. 9. In its pain and fright the poor creature uttered a 
 harsh squeak (squawk). lo. Sulphate (sulphite) of copper is one of its 
 principal ingredients. II. His talents and industry gave him a permanent 
 (preeminent) position in the employ of that company. 12. The delicious 
 fruit was of a russet (roseate) (rusty) hue. 13. Under certain conditions 
 a dead body will petrify (putrify) rapidly. 14. His long and faithful 
 service was rewarded by a prominent (permanent) place in the affections 
 of his fellow-citizens. 15. The accident was found to be due to the de- 
 fective condition of the truck (track). 16. He relinquished his rights in 
 favor of his daughter (debtor). 17. The first of April was a bleak 
 (black), cheerless day. 18. The nature of his business (baseness) was 
 well known, and caused everybody to distrust him. 19. By this unwise 
 division (devotion) of his powers he failed to accomplish anything. 
 
 20. A violent (valiant) temper may lead its possessor into indiscretions. 
 
 21. They were actuated on that occasion by what must be considered a 
 notional (national) sense of duty. 22. By these tactics we think they 
 will be sure to score (secure) a point against their competitors. 23. A 
 scene of awful destruction (distraction) was witnessed by them. 24. A 
 bright ray of delight (daylight) shone in his eyes. 25. We cannot con- 
 sent to prompt (permit) (promote) such an enterprise. 26. The per- 
 mission (promotion) of any such plan would be a mistake on the part of 
 the management. 27. These springs afford a poor (pure) water supply. 
 28. He felt that he could not succeed on account of this one insuperable 
 (inseparable) condition. 29. These men were hired to prosecute (persecute) 
 die youth against whom false charges had been made. 30. We cannot 
 afford to lose our patrons (patterns) in this manner. 31. He was nuich 
 chagrined when he learned that they did not proffer (prefer) his assist- 
 ance. 32. He undertook to present (personate) his friend to the oflicers 
 of the bank. 33. It now seems as if it would be necessary for him to 
 support (separate) the children. 34. The reasons he gave seem to have 
 been abandoned (abundant). 35. Train (turn) your attention to the ol>- 
 servation of matters of importance. 36. She is a girl of gentle (genteel) 
 manners. 37. He is a man of fierce (furious) and vindictive temper. 
 38. The entire body was evidently moved by the righteous (riotous) dis- 
 position of its leader. 39. We wish it to go to the Mrs. (Misses) Smith 
 of whom we spoke to you yesterday. 40. His ingenious (ingenuous) 
 statement of the case caused them to agree at once to his proposals.
 
 Lesson LVIII. — Proper Names. 
 
 287. Proper Names Unaffected by Context. — Per- 
 haps no other single pitfall causes discomfiture to so many 
 amanuenses as the writing of proj^er names. Fear of this 
 danger has even led some unwise phonographers into the 
 time-wasting habit of writing proper names uniformly in 
 longhand. Yet no real difficulty need be experienced if 
 reasonable precautions are taken. In the first place, it must 
 be remembered that proper names are not affected by "con- 
 text" — one will usually make as good sen.se in a given 
 place as another — and for that reason the general rule should 
 be to vocalize fully all outlines for proi)er names. Whenever, 
 in writing proper names, the vowels are omitted, memory, 
 not context, must be depended on. To depend on memory 
 is always bad practise in a shorthand writer, whose notes 
 should be in themselves a perfect record. If it is ever allow- 
 able to leave out the vowels in writing proper names, it can 
 be only in the case of those few names which recur with 
 daily frequency in the routine work of the office in which 
 the amanuensis is employed, and caution must be exercised 
 even in such cases. It is, however, usually sufficient to 
 vocalize a proper name the first time the outline occurs 
 within the compass of a single letter, and if it reappear in 
 the body of the same letter the unvocalized form will suffice, 
 unless the outline be subject to a possible clash. 
 
 288. Clashes.— But if Mr. Smith ^, of Canton f, 
 
 Ohio, and Mr. Smyth v ( , of Kenton f, Ohio, be spoken 
 of in the same letter, it is evident that the names "Smith," 
 
 20S
 
 r roper IMaiucs. 209 
 
 "Smyth," "Canton," "Kenton," must be vocalized when- 
 ever used. Group i in the following exercise shows a num- 
 ber of such clashing outlines. The list, however, is by no 
 means exhaustive, and pro])er names are of such a peculiar 
 nature that it is always possible for an unexpected clash of 
 this kind to arise ; so that it may be said again that the one 
 safe rule is to vocalize proper names in all cases. 
 
 289. Logograms and Affixes not Used in Writ- 
 ing Proper Names. — It would hardly seem necessary to 
 caution phonographers against the use of logograms for repre- 
 senting proper names. Correctly to tran.scribe names so writ- 
 ten would depend upon a pure act of memory. Group 2 
 contains a list of such names, showing them written out in 
 full. It is generally well to avoid the use of afifixes in writ- 
 ing ]) roper names. See group 3. In a few cases, however, 
 the working convenience of using the affix is .so great that it 
 is employed in practise. See group 4. 
 
 290. Spelling of Proper Names. — The varying spell- 
 ing in longhand of man\' jnoper names is a difficulty which 
 the amanuensis must meet in a practical manner. Group 5 
 contains a list of the most common of these names. They 
 should all be carefully memorized, and it should be the prac- 
 tise of the amanuensis to secure the correct spelling of each 
 name. This may be done in various ways — the amanuensis 
 may know the correct spelling of his own personal knowl- 
 edge, or through previous experience, and in such cases he 
 will, of course, transcribe correctly. In other cases the dic- 
 tater may hold in his hand a letter to which he is dictating 
 the answer. If, as is usually the case, the amanuensis have 
 access to this letter, he need only refer to it, when transcrib- 
 ing, to determine how to spell the name. \Mren, however, 
 in any particular case, he has no assured means of determin- 
 
 14
 
 2IO TJic Phonographic Ainamcensis. 
 
 ing the true spelling of the name, he should always quietly 
 interrupt the dictater with the recjuest, "Spell it, please," 
 and then write the name in longhand from the dictater' s 
 spelling. A similar course should be pursued in the case of 
 odd, and especially foreign, names. It is not to be expected 
 of even a well-educated phonographer that he should know 
 that the name which is pronounced and written /^^^__ is spelt 
 " Czarniecki." As already directed, the dictater should be 
 called on to furnish the spelling of proper names in all doubt- 
 ful cases unless the amanuensis has some sure means of refer- 
 ence to a written record, in which case he should, of course, 
 not needlessly interrupt the dictater. 
 
 291. Clashing Geographic Names. — 1 here are a few 
 geographic names especially liable to clash on account of 
 varying spelling with similar sounds. Among the.se should 
 be especially noted Shel)oygan (Wis.), Cheboygan (Mich.); 
 Salina (Colo., Ind. T. , Iowa, Kans., Pa., Utah), Celina 
 (Ind., Ohio, Tenn., Tex.), Selina (Ca.); Eutaw (Ala., 
 Miss.), Utah (111., Pa.); Coalton (Ala., Ky., Ohio, Va., 
 W. Va.), Colton (Cal., N. Y., Ohio, Oregon, S. Dak., 
 Utah, Wa.sh.) 
 
 292. Abbreviations. — In transcribing letters, and es- 
 pecially in addressing enveloj)s, the names of states should 
 either be spelt out fully, or, if shortened, only those official 
 forms of abbreviation adopted by the United States Post- 
 office Department should be employed. The outlines for 
 the states are given in group 6, and in the key below is given 
 the official form of abbreviation. Many errors in the mail- 
 ing of letters are caused by careless writing in longhand of 
 the two abbreviations for Indiana and Maryland. A long- 
 hand "outline" written thus ^VlCl. 'may be read for either.
 
 Proper Names. 
 
 211 
 
 To avoid such a clash care should be used in writing, and in 
 reading addresses showing this ambiguity the "United Slates 
 Postal Guide " should be consulted in order to determine, if 
 possible, in which of the states the post-office is located. No 
 abbreviations other than those for states of the Union should 
 be placed on envelops. Shortenings ^ like "Phila.," for 
 Philadelphia, or "Cin'ti," for Cincinnati, render mail mat- 
 ter on which they are placed technically tindelivei-able because 
 of "incomplete address." The same is true of the use of 
 the word "City" on letters mailed for delivery at one's 
 home post-office. 
 
 Exercise CXII.
 
 212 
 
 The PJionograpJiic Amanuensis. 
 
 I. Hill, Hall, Hyle, Iloyle, Healey, Hawley ; Hale, Hull, Hole, 
 Haley; Keen, Conn; Kane, Cone; Kiihn, Kahn ; Hervey, Harvey; 
 Taylor, Teller, Tyler ; Morton, Martin, Merton ; Blake, Black, lilock, 
 Blackie ; Berkeley, Barclay; Morrison, Emerson; Johnson, Janson, 
 Jensen; Buck, Beck; Howard, Ilarwood, Hardy; Burnes, Barnes; 
 l)avis, Davies ; Peterson, Paterson, Patterson; Werner, Warner; liit^gs, 
 Boggs ; Charleston, Charlestown ; Morse, Morris, Maris ; Plielps, Phil- 
 lips ; Jones, janes ; Welsh, Walsh ; Nelson, Nilsson, Neilson, Nulsen ; 
 Wolseley; Wellesley ; Warren, Warne ; Attica, Utica ; Thorp, Tharp ; 
 Canton, Kenton.
 
 Proper Names. 213 
 
 2. Wood, Orr, Butt, Young, Ann, Child, Dunn, Good, How, Mann, 
 Moore, Reed, Tell, Will, Underwood, Underbill, Goodhue, Roscommon, 
 Wordsworth, Allston. 
 
 3. Reading, Hastings, Connecticut, Wisconsin, Winship. 
 
 4. Concord, Fielding, Spaulding. 
 
 5. Brown, Browne, Braun ; Clark, Clarke ; Dun, Dunn ; Good, 
 Goode ; Green, Greene ; How, Howe ; Johnson, Jonson ; Johnston, 
 Johnstone ; Rede, Reed, Read, Reid, Reede, Reade, Reide ; Sims, Simms, 
 Simmes, Symmes ; Smith, Smyth ; Smyth, Smythe ; Stern, Sterne ; Stuart, 
 Stewart ; Thomson, Thompson ; Thorp, Thorpe ; Tharp, Tharpe ; Town- 
 send, Townshend ; Wild, Wilde ; Wolf, Wolfe ; Young, Yonge ; Pearce, 
 Peirce, Pierce ; Morrison, Morrisson ; Dixon, Dickson ; Rhodes, Rhoades ; 
 McLean, McClain, McLane, Maclean, MacClain, McClane ; Burrows, 
 Burroughs ; Fry, Frye ; Burns, Burnes, Byrnes. 
 
 6. Ala., Alaska, Ariz., Ark., Cal., Colo., Conn., Del., D. C. , Fla. , 
 Ga., Idaho, 111., Ind., Ind. T., Iowa, Kans., Ky., La., Maine, Md., 
 Mass., Mich., Minn., Miss., Mo., Mont., Nebr. Nev., N. IL, N. J., 
 N. Mex., N. Y., N. C, N. Dak., Ohio, Okla., Oregon, Pa., P. R., R. I., 
 S. C, S. Dak., Tenn., Tex., Utah, Vt., Wash., W. Va., Wis., Wyo.
 
 Lesson LIX. — Conclusion, 
 
 293. Phrases. — The phrases )narked-price and marker- 
 price should be carefully distinguished by vocalizing the lat- 
 ter, thus ^---y^^^ ^ 
 
 294, Business Letters. — 
 
 Exercise CXIII. 
 
 ■■- ■ 51 -• 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 \ 2 
 
 r 
 
 n: ^ } ^ 
 
 ) \i L 
 
 
 N^x • .,;..,,--, J :l— :> 
 
 V' * 1 -n / ) 
 
 ■ ^ I. 
 
 ...-^.. 
 
 > \ 
 
 ' ?■■ 
 
 <i^ 
 
 \ 
 
 •^^. 
 
 V, "^ i L^.^'.: ' I :v^ 
 
 o^^ , . k ,.=. '^■^- ^ 
 
 214 
 
 "^ i 
 
 ~y^:
 
 Conclusion. 
 
 ^15 
 
 =- %. ^ u "- ' "- 
 
 52 
 
 ■■^f 
 
 OZUL'C/Tl^/, 
 
 ^y^ ^ ^342.-^^ ^ " N.^ h 
 
 ^ z .^ .....^ r l...j:..,......^,. .k,^ 
 
 ■ ^ ^^^-^■■. k- r^^ L Z ^....0 ..ZZ^ ^... A 
 
 ^— .-^ ^.,Z .^--^.^. ° t-^ p \ f , I, 
 
 ,..o L ^.._ Lzx. 1 z^ c v_-.,^...lL,,:^ rz 
 
 \/^ : 
 
 LZ^>^^^ 
 
 Q^ 
 
 '^./J. 
 
 ,../f'... 
 
 t 
 
 
 ■vi~~N L V, "^ 
 ^■7§ ^ ^^ r 
 
 ^ * / 
 
 - ^-^ ^ - 
 
 ^ kA..:^ rL.'^
 
 2i6 The PhoiiograpJiic Auiamiensis. 
 
 51- 
 
 Mr. F. H, Read, President, 
 
 New York City. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 In handing you herewith my report for the quarter ending March 31, 
 permit me to present for your consideration the application of Mr. Al- 
 fred Maclean for appointment to the position of chief clerk of this di- 
 vision, now vacant through the resignation of Mr. Joseph Janes. For the 
 last year Mr. Maclean has filled the position of shorthand amanuensis in 
 my office, so I am able to speak of him with abundant knowledge of his 
 qualifications; and I am bound to say that I consider him as in every 
 way worthy to be promoted to the place. He is a young man of good gen- 
 eral education, of genteel manners, of industry, of devotion to busi- 
 ness, and of that strict integrity which is so inseparable a part of the 
 character of the ideal incumbent of the position. The only apparent 
 difficulty in the way of his promotion is his youth, for he is not yet 
 quite twenty-two years old. I do not think, however, that this should 
 be considered an insuperable obstacle, in view of his pre-eminent fit- 
 ness for the place, which is so manifest that I consider it a fortunate 
 thing that we should be able to secure his services at this time. It 
 seems to me that it would be a pity to allow any notional objection on 
 the score of his youth to have weight against him. I prefer him to any 
 other man in the division, and I believe that if he is given the oppor- 
 tunity to rise he will prove a permanent element of strength in the bus- 
 iness of this company. 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 Messrs. Emerson & Greene, 
 
 Sheboygan, Wis. 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 We are in receipt of your valued favor of the 3d Inst., inclosing 
 your check for $1342.78, which amount we pass to your credit with 
 thanks. We regret to say that we cannot mail you a receipt in full of 
 account, as requested, for the reason that you have deducted i.% for 
 cash. This we cannot allow, as you will note, on referring to our Sep- 
 tember 1 quotation-sheet, that the marked price is distinctly stated to 
 be net-cash, delivered at your shops. As it is, you are getting this 
 shipment at a very low f igure--several points, in fact, below the market 
 price--and we should not be able to duplicate the order for you if it 
 were given to us to-day. 
 
 We would advise that you purchase right away to the full extent of 
 your requirements, as the season is now at its height, and if the usual 
 indications are to be taken as a guide, prices are sure to advance right 
 along. We inclose herewith our latest quotation-sheet. 
 
 The general outlook for business is now encouraging. We are not 
 influenced by the roseate views of some of our friends; neither do we 
 think that things are as black as painted by some others. We believe, 
 however, that there is going to be a fierce struggle between the longs 
 and the shorts, and we think you will be wise in taking prompt action to 
 put yourselves on the right side of the market. 
 Yours truly.
 
 TriE AMERICAN SYSTEM OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 CATALOG OF 
 
 Phonographic Works 
 
 BENN PITMAN and JEROME B. HOWARD. 
 
 PUBLISHT KY 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC INSTITUTE COMPANY, 
 CINCINNATI, O. 
 
 There is no question whatever of the truth of the statement that 
 the Benn Pitman System is more generally used than any other 
 in this country ; at least this would appear to be true, from the reports 
 made to this Bureau of various institutions teaching shorthand. — Hon. 
 W. T. Harris, Coiniiiissioner of Education {^Washington, D. C), 
 N'oveinber iq, iSgS. 
 
 The following is a graphic summary of the Table of Statistics on 
 the Teaching of Shorthand in the United States, in the Bureau of 
 Education Circular of Information No. i, 1893, pages, 40 to 141 : 
 
 f Benn Pitman, 747 teachers, 
 
 ~""""""^^""^"^"^~""" I 34- 7 % • 
 (jraham, 363 teachers, 16. 8 %. 
 
 K Munson, 228 teachers, 10.6 %. 
 Cross, 185 teachers, 8.6 
 
 -■^^-i™ Isaac Pitman, 143 teachers, 6.7 %. 
 
 ^^K Lindsley, 81 teachers, 3.7 %. 
 
 m^ Pernin, 64 teachers, 2.5 %. 
 
 1^ Scott-Browne, 52 teachers, 2.4 ^. 
 
 -■■ Longley, 52 teachers, 2.4 %. 
 
 — McKee, 36 teachers, 1.6 %. 
 
 ^ Pitman (unspecified), 35 teachers, 1.6 %. 
 
 — Moran, 30 teachers, 1. 3 %. 
 
 — SloanTJuployan, 24 teachers, l.i %. 
 
 Besides 38 others, each being less than I %. 
 To supply the increasing demand for stenographers, schools of short- 
 hand and typewriting have been establisht in various parts of the coun- 
 try, and with few exceptions, all business colleges now have a "depart- 
 ment of shorthand." A number of systems are taught, but that of 
 Benn Pitman is more generally used than any other in this 
 country and may be called the "American System." — Report of 
 the Commissioner of Educatiott, for i88y-8S, page 9^7.
 
 \Jamiary i, igoj.] 
 
 Instruction Books. 
 
 The Manual of Phonography. Ijy ]!enn Pitman and Jerome B. 
 Howard. Designed for instruction in Schools, Academies, etc., as 
 well as for self-instruction, in the art of Shorthand Writing. It con- 
 tains a complete exposition of the system, from it.s simplest principles 
 to the Amanuensis Style, arranged in alternate and opposite pages of 
 explanation and phonographic exercises. Every principle is copiously 
 illustrated with engraved exam])les for reading, and exercises in the 
 ordinary type for writing and dictation practise. A mastery of this 
 book fits the student to act efficiently as a business amanuensis and 
 lays the indispensable foundation for reporting skill as developed in 
 \}{\s. Repoiier'' s Companion. Revised, enlarged and improved. Cloth, 
 200 pp., l2mo $1 00 
 
 "1 he Manual IS also issued in a special leaflet edition, for the use of teachers 
 by correspondence. This leaflet edition is identical with the regular 
 edition, e.xcept in the matter of physical make-up. Each page is printed 
 on a separate leaflet, on one side of the paper only, and the pages are 
 placed in a convenient box, from which the teacher can remove any 
 desired page without disturbing the others. The price of the leaflet 
 edition is the same as the regular edition. In ordering, always mention 
 expressly the "leaflet edition." 
 
 The Phonographic Reader. By Benn Pitm.a.n and Jerome B. 
 Howard. Designed to accompany the Alanual. It affords the 
 necessary reading practise in the Corresponding Style. The selections 
 are taken (by permission) from "McGuffey's Revised Fifth Eclectic 
 Reader," which may be used as a key. Paper, 52 pp., l2mo. 25 
 
 The Second Phonographic Reader. By Bp:nn Pitman and Jerome 
 B. Hii\v.\rd. Designed to accompany the i)/(?««(?/. Contains read- 
 ing exercises engraved in Amanuensis Style, and is keyed by " Mc- 
 Guffey's Revised Sixth Eclectic Keader." Paper, 52 pp., l2mo. 25 
 
 The Phonographic Amanuensis. A Presentation of Pitman 
 PhonDgraphy, More Especially Adapted to the Use of Business and 
 other Schools devoted to the Instruction and Training of Shorthand 
 Amanuenses. By Jerome W. Howard. With a Prefatory Note 
 by Benn Pitman. In this book position-writing and the principles 
 of abbreviation are taught concurrently with the elements of the 
 system. It consists of iifty-nine carefully-graded lessons, each de- 
 signed to constitute the work of a single school-day. Outlines (jf 
 words are given in the first lesson ; sentences are given in the eighth 
 lesson ; phrases appear in the fifteenth lesson ; business letters are 
 written in the twenty-second and sub.sequent lessons. Cloth, 216 
 pp., i2mo I 00 
 
 Business Letters. No. i. — Miscellaneous Correspondence. 
 Written in the Amanuensis Style of Phonography. By Benn Pitman 
 and Jerome B. Howard. The letters have been selected from 
 actual correspondence in various branches of business, and, being 
 
 2
 
 free from ditricult technicalities, are such as will furnish the best 
 practise for young students of shorthand who are ready to begin tit- 
 ling themselves for the duties of the shorthand correspondent or 
 business amanuensis. With key printed in facsimile typewriting, 
 furnishing correct models for the transcription of the student's notes 
 on the typewriter. Paper, 52 pp., i2mo 25 
 
 Business Letters. No. 2.— Railroad Correspondence. Written 
 in the Amanuensis Style of Phonography. Consists of letters actually 
 used in various departments of railroad work. Key in facsimile type- 
 writing. Paper, 52 pp., i2mo 25 
 
 The Reporter's Companion. By Benn Pitman and Jerome B. 
 Howard. A (Juide to rt-?-l>a/iin Reporting; for professional re- 
 porters and those who desire to become such. In this woik, which 
 should be studied only by those who have first mastered the Alamtal 
 of Phonography, the principles of abbreviation used in the Reporting 
 Style of Phonography are clearly explained and amply illustrated. 
 Thousands of reporters have acquired their ability to write verbatim 
 with no other instruction than that afforded by this and the Jl/niiitnl. 
 Cloth, 1S7 pp., i2mo I 00 
 
 The Phonographic Dictionary and Phrase Book. By Benn Pit- 
 man and Jerome B. Howard. Contains a vocabulary of 120,000 
 words, including every useful word in the language and a large num- 
 ber of proper and geographic names, legal, scientific, and technical 
 terms, engraved in phonography with a parallel key in ordinary type. 
 Concerning each word information is given on the following points : 
 I. Spelling; 2. Accentuation; 3. Pronunciation; 4. Capitalization; 
 
 5. Fully-vocalized (or Corresponding Style) phonographic outline; 
 
 6. Reporting Style outline ; 7. Compounding ; 8. Principal phrases 
 which it begins. The phonographic outlines are clearly and beauti- 
 fully engraved, no roundabout, complicated "nomenclature" being 
 employed. [Specimen pages will be sent on request.] Cloth, 552 
 pp., 8vo 3 00 
 
 Instructions in Practical Court Reporting. By H. W. Thorne. 
 The standard work on this important subject. Exemplifies, explains 
 and instructs as to all the details of trials, teaching the shorthand 
 writer how to use his skill in making a legal record. Contains valu- 
 able suggestions to lawyers and law students found in no other work. 
 Has received emphatic testimonials from official court reporters, 
 judges, lawyers, law lecturers, teachers of shorthand and the press. 
 Cloth, 237 pp., l2mo I 00 
 
 Books Printed in Phonography. 
 
 On Self-Culture, Intellectual, Physical, and Moral. A vade mecum 
 for young men and students. By JoHN Stuart Blackie, professor 
 of Greek in the University of Edinburgh. Printed in the Amanuensis 
 Style of Phonography, by Benn Pitman and Jerome B. Howard. 
 
 Paper, 67 pp., l2mo 35 
 
 3
 
 The Legend of Sleepy Hollow, l'>y Washington Irving. In 
 the Amanuensis Style. Paper, 31 pp., l2mo 25 
 
 Rip Van Winkle. By Washington Irving. In the Amanuensis 
 Style. Paper, 22 pp 25 
 
 Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr, Hyde. By Robert Louis 
 SiKXENSoN. In the Aniainiensis Style. Paper, 66 pp 35 
 
 History of Sindbad the Sailor. From the "Arabian Nights' Enter- 
 tainments." In the Amanuensis Style. Paper, 45 pp., i2mo. 25 
 
 The Man Without a Country. By Edward Everett Hale. 
 In the Amanuensis Style. Paper, 29 pp 25 
 
 A Dog of Flanders. ISy "Ouida." In the Amanuensis Style. 
 Paper, 39 pp 25 
 
 Plain Talk. By C. H. Spurgeon. In the Corresponding Style. 
 
 Paper, 32 pp., l2mo 25 
 
 [See also Tlie Phonographic Library, page 6.] 
 
 Typewriter Instruction Books. 
 
 The Touch Writer. A text-book for self- and class-instruction in the 
 art of operating the typewriter without looking at the keyboard. 
 By J. E. Fuller. Shift-Key Edition, designed for the Remington, 
 Densmore, Fay-Sho, Underwood, and other writing machines having 
 a .shift-key and the "Universal" keyboard. Boards, 48 pp., oblong 
 
 4to 50 
 
 Double- Keyboard Edition, designed for the Smith Premier, Jewett, 
 Yost, New Century Caligraph, and other writing-machines having a 
 double "universal" keyboard. Boards, 48 pp., oblong 4to..,. 50 
 
 Remington Typewriter Lessons, for the Use of Teachers and 
 Learners. Designed to develop accurate and rapid operators. By 
 Mrs. M. V. Longley. Paper, 48 pp., 410 50 
 
 The Smith Premier Typewriter Instructor. By the Eight Finger 
 Melhiici, in which the must rapid and least tiresome mode of writing 
 every word correctly is clearly indicated, including suggestions and 
 exercises for acquiring the art of writing by position, without looking 
 at keyboard ; containing also practical exercises in correspondence, 
 business and legal papers, testimony, contracts, specifications, orna- 
 mentations, etc., etc. By Elias Longley. Paper, 48 pp., 410. 50 
 
 The Yost Typewriter Instructor. By the Eight-Pinger Method, 
 etc. By Elias l.oNin.i'.v. Pai)er, 48 pp., 4to 50 
 
 The National Typewriter Instructor. By the Eight-Finger 
 
 Method, etc. l^.y Elias Longley. Paper, 48 pp., 410 50 
 
 Longley's Typewriter Instructor, In accordance with a scientific 
 keyboard, etc. By Elias 1,oN(;ley. Paper, 48 pp., 4to 50 
 
 4
 
 Miscellaneous. 
 
 How Long— A Symposium.— Consists of contributions on the length 
 of time required for obtaining verbatim speed in shorthand writing, 
 from the following eminent reporters: Jerome B. Allen, Eliza B. 
 Burnz, Chas. E. Weller, \Vm. A. Croffut, H. W. Thome, Henry M. 
 Parkhurst, Spencer C. Rodgers, Daniel C. McEwan, Thomas Allen 
 Reed, Wm. Whitford, Edw. B. Dickinson, Philander Deming, Julius 
 Wold'emar Zeibig, Benn Pitman, Theo. F. Shuey, Thos. Towndrow. 
 Theo. C. Rose, Sherburne Wesley Burnham, Wm. Henry Burr, Elias 
 Longley, Dennis F. Murphy, Edw. F. Underbill, Adelbert P. Little, 
 Chas. C. Marble, Tobn B. Carey, Frederic Irland, David Wolfe 
 Browne. A remarkable assemblage of opinions and experiences. 
 Full of happy suggestions to teachers and self-instructed learners of 
 shorthand. Illustrated with a finely-engraved portrait of each con- 
 tributor. 189 pages. Paper, 50 cents ; Cloth 75 
 
 The Teaching of Shorthand. By G. A. Clark. This essay was 
 awarded a prize of Two Hundred and Fifty Dollars offered by the 
 editor of the Phonographic Magazine, in which it was originally 
 printed. It should be read by every progressive teacher of shorthand 
 regardless of systems. Paper 25 
 
 The Mastery of Shorthand. By David Wolfe Browne, Official 
 Reporter, National House of Representatives. An essay on mastery 
 by a master. (3ne of the most important contributions to the litera- 
 ture of shorthand pedagogy. It deserves an attentive reading by 
 every thoughtful teacher ot phonography. Paper 35 
 
 Phonography— What it Is and What it Does. By Benn Pitman. 
 Gives a concise account of the nature and capabilities of phonography 
 (including a compend of the art, with engraved examples accompanied 
 by key-words) ; also a brief historical account of the origin and devel- 
 opment of Phonography in England and America. Paper 3 
 
 Special imprint editions for teachers at greatly reduced rates. 
 
 Baby Talk. A text-book for Babies on the Art of Eearning to Speak. 
 By P. W. A happy thought, happily formulated by a phonographer, 
 for assisting parents to lead very young children, unconsciously to 
 them, into a knowledge and correct use of the phonetic elements of 
 English. Paper 25 
 
 The Dictater. A Collection of Graded Dictation Exercises for the use 
 of Teachers and Students of Shorthand. By MiNA Ward. Consists 
 of exercises suitable for class-room dictation, counted and arranged to 
 facilitate reading at any desired speed. The exercises are also ar- 
 ranged in order according to the average number of syllables in the 
 words which each contains. Cloth I 00 
 
 The Stenographer's Dictation and Form-Book. A guide to 
 practical work for students in shorthand and typewriting, containing 
 court records, business letters, and law forms. By Clayton C. Herr
 
 (()fficial Reporter of tlie McLean County, 111., Circuit Court since 
 
 1S76), and Anna M. Campkkll, assistant. Cloth, 262 pp i 50 
 
 The Game of Shorthand. An amusing and instructive game of cards 
 for sliorthand writers as well as for those unacquainted with the art. 
 While playing this game all the leading principles of Phonography 
 can be learned. Can be played by any number of persons, and 
 delights young and old alike. In box, together with rules for 
 P'aying 75 
 
 Periodical Publications. 
 
 The Phonographic Magazine. Edited by Jerome B. Howard. 
 Publishtonce a month. Each number contains many pages of beauti- 
 fully-engraved phonography, besides original and contributed articles 
 of general phonographic interest. The Magazine is now in its 
 nineteenth volume, is a periodical complement to the text-books, and 
 the authentic organ of the Benn Pitman system of Phonography. 
 Subscriptions may begin with any number. Specimen copy free. 
 
 Price, per annum (invariably in advance) .50 
 
 Vols. I to XVIII (except Vol. VI, which is out of print), bound in 
 cloth, each 2. GO 
 
 The Phonographic Library. Each number contains a complete 
 work of standard literature printed in Reporting Style. All back 
 numbers can be furnished except those markt*. 
 
 Single numbers 10 
 
 Series II finely bound in cloth i 75 
 
 First Series. 
 
 No. I. Sir Roger de Coverly, by Joseph Addison; 2. Perseus, by Charles 
 Kingsley ; 3. The Greatest Thing in the World, by Henry Drummond ; 4. *The 
 Legend of Sleepy Hollow, by Washington Irving; 5. Rah and His Friends, and 
 Onr Dogs, by Dr. John Brown; 6. Dreams, by Olive Schreiner ; 7. Rappaccim's 
 Daughter, by Nathaniel Hawthorne; 8. The Masque of the Red Death, and 
 Other Tales, by Edgar Allan Poe ; 9. The Corvette "Claymore," by Victor 
 Hugo; 10. Two Ghost Stories, and A Child's Dream of a Star, by Charles 
 Dickens; 11. Tales from Shakespeare (The Tempest, The Winter's Tale), by 
 Charles and Mary Lamb; 12. *The Man Without a Country, by Edward 
 Everett Hale. 
 
 Second Series. 
 
 No. 13. The Tattler's Court, by Joseph Addison ; 14. Jackanapes, by Juiiana 
 Horatia Ewing ; 15. Theseus, by Charles Kingsley ; 16. The King of the Golden 
 Kivcr, by John Ruskin ; 17. Pax Vobiscum, by Henry Drummond; 18. The
 
 Marquis Jeanne Hyacinthe de St. Palaye, by J. H. Shorthouse ; ig. The Specter 
 Bridegroom, and The Devil and Tom Walker, by Washington Irving; 20. The 
 Study of the Law, by Timothy Walker; 21. Marjorie Fleming, by Dr. John 
 Brown; 22. The Sons of Philemon, by Gertrude Hall ; 23. Dream Life and Real 
 Life, by Olive Schreincr ; 24. The Lost Arts, and Other Addresses, by Wendell 
 Phillips. 
 
 Phonographic Stationery. 
 
 The Phonographic Copy-Book. Made of double-ruled paper, such 
 as is used by most reporters, but with the lines wider apart for the 
 learner. This paper is especially useful to the beginner, and assists 
 him to acquire a, neat and uniform style of writing. 
 
 Paper, 5 cents; postpaid 7 
 
 Per dozen, 50 cents ; postpaid 65 
 
 Reporting Paper, double-ruled, per quire, 6 cents, postpaid 11 
 
 Per ream, j^i.oo; five reams, #4.50, sent by express at purchaser's 
 charge. In ordering, specify whether paper for pen or pencil is 
 wanted. 
 
 Learner's Paper, wide double lines, like the ruling of the Phonographic 
 Copy-Book. Can be used with either pen or pencil, per quire, 6 cents, 
 
 postpaid 1 1 
 
 In quantity, same prices as Reporting Paper. 
 
 The "Phonographic Institute" Note Book. 200 pages, 41^ x 8)^ 
 inches, pen or pencil paper, double-ruled. Boards, each, 15 cents, 
 
 postpaid 25 
 
 Per dozen I 50 
 
 When more than three books are ordered, they will be sent lay 
 express, at purchaser's charge, unless otherwise directed. 
 
 The "New Legal" Note Book, too pages, 5>^x8"^ double col 
 umn, pen or pencil paper, single or double ruled. Tag-board covers, 
 bound with tape so as to open Hat. Each, 10 cents, postpaid, 18 
 
 Per dozen I 00 
 
 When more than six books are ordered, they will be sent by ex- 
 press, at purchaser's charge, unless otherwise directed. 
 
 The " Phonographic Institute " Steel Pen, Expressly manufactured 
 for us for phonographic writing and reporting. These pens have 
 especially fine, smooth points, and pleasant uniform action. The 
 peculiar shape is such that a great deal of ink is held by the pen with- 
 out danger of dropping, thus reducing to a minimum the frequency of 
 dipping the pen. 
 
 No. I, fine points. 
 FSH-qyosBf TOj^ No. 2, medium points. 
 No. 3, coarse points. 
 Per dozen, 10 cents; per gross,... i (X; 
 
 7
 
 The "Phonographic Institute" Lead Pencil. Made expressly 
 for us (actual diameter sliovvn in cut), with the finest grade ot black 
 
 .i^hi^ifeiiQiG^^igiii(yi.i^ip^^y 
 
 tough lead, and especially recommended for plionographer's use. 
 Per dozen, 50 cents ; per gross 5 00 
 
 Phonographic Tracts. 
 
 No. I. What They Say about Phonography — Opinions of Fifty Eminent 
 Men and Journals. 
 
 2. Some Reasons Why You should Learn Phonography. 
 
 3. Can Phonography Be Self-1'aught ? 
 
 4. The Long Gains of Shorthand. 
 
 5. Phonography in the Public Schools. 
 
 6. Shorthand for Clergymen. 
 
 7. Modifications of Phonography — Wise and Otherwise. 
 
 8. Points of Difference between the Benn Pitman and the Present 
 
 English Style of Phonography, 
 g. What Official Reporters Say about the Benn Pitman System. 
 
 10. The Educational Value of Shorthand. 
 
 11. What Some Leading Schools and Colleges Say about the Benn 
 
 Pitman System. 
 
 12. Shorthand for Lawyers. 
 
 The.se tracts are suitable for distribution by teachers and Others who 
 wish to spread information in regard to Phonography. Single copies 
 free, per 100, 10 cents; per thousand, 75 cents, with imprint, $i 00. 
 Imprint will not be placed on fewer than one thousand copies of any 
 one tract. 
 
 Copies of this Catalog, for distribution, free. 
 
 The works herein described are for sale by all booksellers, or will be 
 forwarded by us, postpaid (except when postage charges are given), 
 on receipt of the prices specified. Safe delivery by mail is guaran- 
 teed only when order is accompanied by eight cents additional for 
 registration fee. No goods will be sent by express C. O. D. unless 
 order is accompanied by at least one-fourth of the price, to insure 
 payment of charges. Sample pages of any publication will be sent 
 to teachers on request. 
 
 Schools and Teachers of rhonograpJiy and Booksellers siippliea at a 
 
 liberal discount. 
 All orders must be accompatiied by a remittance. Send post-office money 
 
 order, express money order, New York or Cincinnati draft. 
 
 N. B. — Local checks will not be accepted. 
 
 Address, THE PHONOGRAPHIC INSTITUTE COMPANY, 
 
 Cincinnati, O.
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 Form L9-10m-3,'48(A7920)444 
 
 UNIVEKSll Y oT CALlFOKJNLfv 
 
 AT 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 A 000 571 270 8 
 
 Z56 
 
 H83p 
 
 'IK
 
 II ;